EFIS 50 User Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 232

coverMP 9/8/10 7:34 PM Page 1

Pilot’s Guide EFS 40/50


Bendix/King® 4-inch/5-inch
Electronic Flight
Instrumentation System

n
coverMP 9/8/10 7:35 PM Page 2
Registration 9/8/10 7:36 PM Page I.1

Registration

This pilot's guide has been tailored by the installation and or certifica-
tion agency to cover the following EFS 40/50 installation:

AIRCRAFT TYPE

AIRCRAFT TAIL OR SERIAL NUMBER

AIRCRAFT OWNER

EFIS TYPE (EFS 40 or EFS 50)

EFIS SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

EFIS SYSTEM SOFTWARE LEVEL

EFIS DISPLAY UNIT TYPE

EFIS CONTROL PANELS

REVERSIONARY MODES

Throughout this pilot's guide various configuration options are


described. A 4o (check box) precedes each configuration option. A
check mark may be placed in the appropriate boxes to define which
configuration options are available in a given installation.
Registration 9/8/10 7:36 PM Page I.2

Registration
TOCmp 9/8/10 7:41 PM Page TOC.1

Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section I

INTRODUCTION I.1

Section 1

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1


GENERAL 1.1
CONTROL PANEL 1.2
SYMBOL GENERATOR 1.3
EQUIPMENT INTERFACE & OPERATING CONFIGURATION 1.5
SOFTWARE 04 CONFIGURATION PAGES 1.6
SOFTWARE 05 CONFIGURATION PAGES 1.9
SOFTWARE 06 CONFIGURATION PAGES 1.12
SOFTWARE 07 CONFIGURATION PAGES 1.15
(includes both 0701 and 0702)
SOFTWARE 08 CONFIGURATION PAGES 1.18
SOFTWARE 09 CONFIGURATION PAGES 1.21
SOFTWARE 10 CONFIGURATION PAGES 1.25
SOFTWARE 11 CONFIGURATION PAGES 1.29
SOFTWARE 12 CONFIGURATION PAGES 1.33
SOFTWARE 13 CONFIGURATION PAGES 1.37
SOFTWARE 14 CONFIGURATION PAGES 1.41
SOFTWARE 15 CONFIGURATION PAGES 1.45
SOFTWARE 16 CONFIGURATION PAGES 1.48

Section 2

EHSI OPERATION 2.1.1


DETAILED OPERATING CONTROLS 2.1.1
EHSI CONTROLS (ED 461 & CP 467/468) 2.1.1
1-2 NAVIGATION SYSTEM SELECT 2.1.3
NAV NAVIGATION SENSOR SELECT 2.1.3
HSI 360° MODE SELECTION 2.1.5
BEARING POINTER SELECT 2.1.6
ARC SECTORED MODE SELECTION 2.1.7
RANGE SELECTION 2.1.8
TST/REF 2.1.8
TST— 2.1.8
REF GROUND SPEED
or TIME-TO-STATION selection 2.1.8
REF MAP FORMAT 2.1.9
COURSE SELECT KNOB 2.1.10
HEADING SELECT KNOB 2.1.10
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS CONTROL 2.1.10

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 TOC.1


TOCmp 9/8/10 7:41 PM Page TOC.2

Table of Contents

EADI OPERATION 2.2.1


EADI DETAILED OPERATING CONTROLS 2.2.1
BRIGHTNESS 2.2.2
DH SET 2.2.2
RALT TST 2.2.2

RADAR OPERATION 2.3.1


RADAR CONTROLS, (CP 466A & CP 466B) 2.3.1
OFF-STBY-TST-ON 2.3.2
OFF 2.3.2
STBY 2.3.2
TST 2.3.2
ON 2.3.2
WX 2.3.2
WXA 2.3.2
GND MAP 2.3.2
LIGHTNING 2.3.3
VP 2.3.3
TRK 2.3.4
GAIN 2.3.5
PULL ARL 2.3.5
TILT 2.3.5

MFD OPERATION 2.4.1


MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL 2.4.1
CONTROL PANEL BUTTON OPERATIONS 2.4.2
COURSE SELECT KNOB/BUTTON 2.4.2
HSI BUTTON 2.4.2
ARC BUTTON 2.4.2
NAV BUTTON 2.4.2
1-2 BUTTON 2.4.3
BEARING #1 & #2 BUTTON 2.4.3
RANGE UP/DOWN BUTTON 2.4.3
JOYSTICK 2.4.3
WAYPOINT ENTRY OPERATION 2.4.3
PLAN VIEW OPERATION (available with 07 and higher) 2.4.4
CHECKLIST OPERATION(available with 08 and higher) 2.4.5
ENT BUTTON 2.4.5
WAYPOINT ENTRY OPERATION 2.4.5
PLAN VIEW OPERATION(available with 07 and higher) 2.4.5
CHECKLIST OPERATION(available with 08 and higher) 2.4.6
TEST/REFERENCE 2.4.6
CHECKLIST SELECT (available with 08 and higher) 2.4.6
TCAS ONLY SELECT (available with 08 and higher) 2.4.6

TOC.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


TOCmp 9/8/10 7:41 PM Page TOC.3

Table of Contents

Section 3

ABBREVIATED OPERATIONS 3.1

Section 4

EHSI DISPLAYS 4.1.1


EFS 40/50 COLOR STANDARDS 4.1.1
STANDARD EHSI DISPLAYS 4.1.1
NORMAL COMPASS CARD 4.1.1
NAVIGATION SOURCE ANNUNCIATION 4.1.2
SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT 4.1.3
HEADING SELECT “BUG” 4.1.4
COURSE SELECT 4.1.4
LATERAL COURSE DEVIATION SCALE 4.1.5
LATERAL COURSE DEVIATION BAR 4.1.6
TO/FROM INDICATOR 4.1.6
DISTANCE, GROUNDSPEED and TIME-TO-STATION 4.1.6
DUAL MULTICHANNEL DME INSTALLATIONS 4.1.7
DME HOLD 4.1.8
BEARING POINTER 4.1.9
MAGNETIC/TRUE HEADING ANNUNCIATIONS 4.1.11
RADIO ALTITUDE 4.1.11
GLIDE SLOPE/VERTICAL NAVIGATION 4.1.11
WIND VECTOR 4.1.13
DRIFT ANGLE POINTER ( LNAV only) 4.1.13
LNAV MODE ANNUNCIATIONS 4.1.14
360 Map Displays 4.1.14
MAP 360 COMPASS CARD 4.1.15
SELECTED COURSE 4.1.15
MAP COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR 4.1.16
TO/FROM 4.1.16
BEARING POINTER 4.1.16
REFERENCE WAYPOINT 4.1.16
RANGE RING 4.1.17
360-DEGREE MAP WX RADAR (IF EQUIPPED) 4.1.18
RDR 1400 WEATHER RADAR 4.1.19
LIGHTNING DETECTION 4.1.20
FULL TIME LNAV MAP 4.1.21
ARC (Expanded Sectored Mode) Displays 4.1.22
HDG BUG (ALL ARC FORMAT MODES) 4.1.22
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR
(EHSI ARC NON-MAP FORMAT) 4.1.22

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 TOC.3


TOCmp 9/8/10 7:41 PM Page TOC.4

Table of Contents

Custom (Non-Standard EHSI) Displays 4.1.23


DOPPLER 4.1.23
COMPASS CARD 4.1.23
DOPPLER VELOCITY BARS 4.1.23
VELOCITY AND TARGET SCALE 4.1.23
LNAV GROUND SPEED AND READOUT 4.1.24
WIND VECTOR INFORMATION 4.1.24
TARGET WAYPOINT 4.1.24
TENDENCY CIRCLE 4.1.24
MEMORY 4.1.24
HEADING BUG 4.1.24
CABLE 4.1.25
COMPASS CARD 4.1.25
ANGLE BARS 4.1.25
FUNNEL SCALE 4.1.25
WIND VECTOR INFORMATION 4.1.25
OPTIMUM CABLE POSITION CIRCLE 4.1.26
THRUST COMMAND 4.1.26
HEADING BUG 4.1.26
HOMING 4.1.26
LATERAL DEVIATION BAR 4.1.27

EADI DISPLAYS 4.2.1


NORMAL ATTITUDE DISPLAY 4.2.1
PITCH ATTITUDE 4.2.1
ROLL ATTITUDE 4.2.1
ROLL INDICATOR 4.2.2
Sky Pointer Roll Scale 4.2.2
Roll Indicator Scale 4.2.2
PERSPECTIVE LINES 4.2.2
SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT 4.2.2
HEADING TAPE 4.2.3
FLIGHT DIRECTOR COMMAND BARS 4.2.3
AUTOPILOT/FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODE ANNUNCIATION 4.2.4
STANDARD 429 AUTOPILOT/FLIGHT
DIRECTOR MODE ANNUNCIATION 4.2.4
SFIM CDV AUTOPILOT/FLIGHT
DIRECTOR MODE ANNUNCIATION 4.2.7
RADIO ALTIMETER 4.2.8
DECISION HEIGHT SET 4.2.9
DECISION HEIGHT ALERT 4.2.9
PRECISION APPROACH MODE FORMAT 4.2.9
EXPANDED LATERAL DEVIATION SCALE 4.2.9
RISING RUNWAY 4.2.10
GLIDESLOPE/VERTICAL NAVIGATION 4.2.11

TOC.4 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


TOCmp 9/8/10 7:41 PM Page TOC.5

Table of Contents

EADI OFF-SIDE ILS/MLS 4.2.11


MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATION 4.2.12
FAST/SLOW OR COLLECTIVE DISPLAY 4.2.12
MACH DISPLAY 4.2.13
RATE OF TURN DISPLAY 4.2.13
CATEGORY II ANNUNCIATOR 4.2.14
CATEGORY II OPERATION ANNUNCIATIONS 4.2.14
DUAL EFS SYSTEM 4.2.14
SINGLE EFS SYSTEM 4.2.15
CATEGORY II THRESHOLDS 4.2.16
ATTITUDE MONITOR 4.2.17
CROSS COMPARATOR ANNUNCIATORS 4.2.17
RA 4.2.17
LOC 4.2.17
GS 4.2.17
ATT 4.2.17
HDG 4.2.18

COMPOSITE DISPLAYS 4.3.1


COMPOSITE MODE 4.3.1
HEADING TAPE 4.3.1
SELECTED COURSE 4.3.1
HEADING BUG SELECT 4.3.1
NAVIGATION SOURCE ANNUNCIATION 4.3.2
LATERAL COURSE DEVIATION SCALE 4.3.2
LATERAL COURSE DEVIATION BAR 4.3.2
TO/FROM 4.3.3
DISTANCE INFORMATION 4.3.3
DME HOLD 4.3.3

MFD DISPLAYS 4.4.1


CRS, NOT CRS SELECT 4.4.1
WEATHER ONLY 4.4.1
TRACK LINE 4.4.1
VERTICAL PROFILE (VP) 4.4.1
SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT 4.4.1
RANGE RINGS 4.4.2
ALTITUDE LINE 4.4.2
PROFILE ANGLE 4.4.2
PLAN VIEW NORTH-UP MAP 4.4.2
CHECKLIST INTERFACE 4.4.3
LOADING AND MODIFYING CHECKLIST DATA 4.4.3
CHECKLIST PAGE ORGANIZATION 4.4.4
ROOT INDEX PAGE 4.4.4

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 TOC.5


TOCmp 9/8/10 7:41 PM Page TOC.6

Table of Contents

SUB INDEX PAGES 4.4.5


CHECKLIST ITEM PAGES 4.4.5
NOTE PAGES 4.4.6
CLEARING CHECKLIST ITEMS 4.4.6
EMERGENCY PAGE ACTIVATION 4.4.6
CHECKLIST CONTROLS 4.4.7
Checklist: CHKLIST 4.4.7
Joystick 4.4.7
Enter : ENT 4.4.8
HSI 4.4.9
ARC 4.4.9
NAV 4.4.9
Up Arrow 4.4.9
Down Arrow 4.4.9
1-2 4.4.9
RMI 1 4.4.10
RMI 2 4.4.10
CRS (NOT) SEL 4.4.10
TST REF 4.4.10
CRS Knob 4.4.10
REMOTELY MOUNTED SWITCHES 4.4.10
FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS 4.4.10
TCAS INTERFACE 4.4.11
TCAS ONLY SELECTION 4.4.11
TCAS DISPLAY FORMAT 4.4.12
TCAS TRAFFIC SYMBOLOGY 4.4.12
Intruder Symbols 4.4.12
Vertical Speed Arrow 4.4.12
Data Tag 4.4.12
Off-Scale Traffic 4.4.13
TCAS DISPLAY ANNUNCIATIONS 4.4.13
Traffic 4.4.13
TCAS 4.4.13
TCAS Status 4.4.14
TCAS Mode 4.4.14
Range 4.4.15
Above/Norm/Below 4.4.15
No-Bearing Traffic 4.4.15
FLXXX and FL 4.4.15
EGPWS INTERFACE 4.4.16
EGPWS SELECTION 4.4.16
EGPWS DISPLAY FORMAT 4.4.16
EGPWS MODE/STATUS 4.4.16
EGPWS RANGE 4.4.16

TOC.6 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


TOCmp 9/8/10 7:41 PM Page TOC.7

Table of Contents

Section 5

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 5.1


PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES 5.1
START UP 5.1
SELF TEST 5.1
PUSH BUTTON TEST 5.1
PRE-TAKEOFF PROCEDURES 5.2
IN-FLIGHT OPERATION 5.2
ADF 5.2
LNAV (RNAV) 5.3
VNAV 5.3
APPROACH PROCEDURES 5.3
ILS APPROACH 5.3
BACK COURSE APPROACH 5.4
ADF APPROACH 5.4
LNAV (RNAV) APPROACH 5.4
VNAV GPS PRECISION APPROACH 5.4
VOR APPROACH 5.5
DECISION HEIGHT SELECTION 5.5
LIMITATIONS 5.5
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 5.5

Section 6

FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS 6.1


GENERAL 6.1
EXTERNAL SYSTEM FAILURES 6.1
HEADING 6.1
ATTITUDE 6.1
FLIGHT DIRECTOR 6.1
EFS 40/50 SYSTEM FAILURES 6.1
DU—DISPLAY UNIT LOSS OF COOLING 6.1
SG—SYMBOL GENERATOR LOSS OF COOLING 6.1
CP—CONTROL PANEL (CP 467, CP 468,
ED 461 OR CP 470) 6.2
HEADING SELECT “BUG” 6.2
COURSE SELECT 6.2
RCP—RADAR CONTROL PANEL (if equipped) 6.2
SG—SYMBOL GENERATOR 6.2
RAW DATA DEVIATION ANNUNCIATIONS 6.3
BEARING POINTER ANNUNCIATIONS 6.3
ALPHANUMERIC READOUT ANNUNCIATIONS 6.3
CHECK CONFIG 6.3

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 TOC.7


TOCmp 9/8/10 7:41 PM Page TOC.8

Table of Contents

WEATHER RADAR ANNUNCIATIONS 6.4


WX FLT 6.4
WX OFF 6.4
BUSY VP 6.4
RT FLT 6.4
STB LMT 6.4
TGTALRT 6.4
TGT 6.4
429 FLT 6.4
ANT FLT 6.5
TX FLT 6.5
RANGE 6.5
STB OFF 6.5
WAIT 6.5
CUSTOM DISPLAY FAILURE ANNUNCIATIONS 6.5
DOPPLER/CABLE 6.5
EXTERNAL SYSTEM FAILURES 6.5
FMS Warning 6.5
Autopilot Warning 6.5
TCAS FAULT MESSAGES 6.6
Fault Messages for TCAS Fail 6.6
Fault Messages for No TCAS 6.6
LIGHTNING DETECTION DISPLAY FAULT MESSAGES 6.6

Section 7

REVERSIONARY MODES 7.1


CMPST - COMPOSITE 7.2
COPY OFF-SIDE 7.3
DISPLAY (EADI) DOWN 7.4
STBY - STANDBY 7.5
REVERSIONARY MODE SELECTION 7.6
THREE TUBE EFS 40/50 7.6
FOUR TUBE EFS 40/50 7.7
FIVE TUBE EFS 40 7.8
FIVE TUBE EFS 50 7.9

Section 8

GLOSSARY 8.1
ABBREVIATIONS 8.1

Section 9

INDEX 9.1

TOC.8 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section I 9/8/10 7:43 PM Page I.1

Introduction

INTRODUCTION
This pilot’s guide describes the provides the radar control func-
components, operation, and tion when an RDS 81/82/84 or 86
operational procedures of the weather radar is interfaced with
BENDIX/KING EFS 40/50 Elec- the system, and the associated
tronic Flight Instrumentation Sys- radar control/display unit is not
tem (EFIS) containing system installed.
software 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09,
The EFS 50 system uses a
10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16.
remote CP 467 mode controller
The EFS 40 system uses either a and an ED 551/A display unit for
single control display unit, four control and display of navigation
inch ED 461, or a separate data and sensor selection. The
CP 467 mode controller and four remote SYMBOL GENERATOR,
inch ED 462 display unit for con- S G 464 or SG 465, interfaces
trol and display of navigation data with the navigation sensors to
and sensor selection. When a compute the display and EFIS
Multi-Function Display is incorpo- output data required by other
rated in the system, the systems on board the aircraft.
CP 469/A will control and select The SG 464 is no longer avail-
navigation data for display on the able and has not been produced
MFD. A CP 466A or CP 466B with software versions 08 or later.

Equipment covered in this pilot's guide includes:


ED 461 Control display unit, 4" X 4"
ED 462 Display unit, 4" X 4"
SG 464 EHSI/MFD-only symbol generator
(not available with software 08 or later)
SG 465 EFIS symbol generator
CP 466A RDS 81/82/84 radar control panel
CP 466B RDS 86 radar control panel
CP 467 EFIS control panel with DH set and test
CP 468 EFIS control panel, less DH set and test
CP 469 MFD control panel
CP 469A MFD control panel with Checklist,
TCAS and Joystick features
CP 470 EADI brightness and DH set and test panel
ED 551 Display unit, 5" X 5" (not available in current production)
ED 551A Display unit, 5" X 5" (~16% larger symbols
compared with ED 461/2 presentation)

An Abbreviated Operations 40/50 in minimal detail. The


section included in this manual Abbreviated Operations section
covers the functions of the EFS gives a brief visual overview of

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 I.1


Section I 9/8/10 7:43 PM Page I.2

Introduction

features and push button opera- illustrations are to familiarize


tions. However, it is necessary to the pilot wit h the type and
read the entire Pilot’s Guide for a placement of data to be provid -
full understanding of the ed by the EFS 40/50.
EFS 40/50 system.
ED 551A is the only version in
N o t e : The EFS 40/50 display current production.
illustrations used in this pilot's
guide are artist's reproduc - The data presented in this
tions. Extreme care has been pilot’s guide is general in
taken to ensure the accuracy nature and not tailored toward
of symbology placement and a specific installation. Not all
relative size. However, it is equipment interfaces nor dis -
impossible to exactly duplicate play options presented are cer -
the display of a CRT and com - tifiable in all aircraft types or by
pensate for all brightness lev - all certification agencies. Each
els, as line width displayed on installation may incorporate
the CRT varies with bright - different equipment comple -
ness. In many cases, unrealis - ments and use different dis -
tic displays provide the most play options. For the unique
informative display possible on certified operating procedure
a single display. Therefore, of a particular aircraft, refer to
we ask that you use and treat the appropriate approved
the graphic illustrations con - Flight Manual Supplement for
tained in this pilot's guide as that aircraft.
they were intended. These

I.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:44 PM Page 1.1

System Configuration

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
GENERAL • 1 ea EHSI Display
Unit (ED 551A),
Various configurations of the • 1 ea EADI Display
EFS 40/50 system are currently Unit (ED 551A)
available to fulfill the particular • 1 ea Symbol Generator
needs of the user. These config- (SG 465)
urations are differentiated by the
number of display units, type of Beginning with software 09, a
mode controller, number of sym- configuration option was added
bol generators and the interfac- allowing an MFD only installation.
ing equipment. This option removes the heading
bug from the display allowing the
The basic EFS 40 ( 2 tube four MFD SG to stand alone without
inch Electronic Flight Instrumen- any other symbol generator in
tation System) consists of: the installation. The display unit
in this case can be either an ED
• 1ea EHSI Control/Display 462 or ED 551A. The control
Unit (ED 461) panel must be a CP 469A.
• 1 ea EADI Display
Unit (ED 462) o MFD ONLY - no selected
• 1 ea EADI control heading bug.
panel (CP 470)
• 1 ea Symbol Generator Two new configuration options
(SG 465) for display unit (DU) type were
also added with software 09.
• Or 1 ea remote EFIS These options allow the MFD SG
Control Panel (CP 467) to drive a 5” ED 551A MFD dur-
• 1 ea EHSI Display ing normal operation and change
Unit (ED 462) to either ED 461 or ED 462 EHSI
• 1 ea EADI Display and ED 462 EADI during standby
Unit (ED 462) operation.
• 1 ea Symbol Generator
(SG 465) o MFD - ED 551A
EHSI - ED 461
The basic EFS 50 (2 tube five EADI - ED 462
inch Electronic Flight Instrumen-
tation System) consists of: o MFD - ED 551A
EHSI - ED 462
• 1 ea remote EFIS Control
EADI - ED 462
Panel (CP 467)

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.1


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:44 PM Page 1.2

System Configuration

ED 551/A MFD & CP 469A

2 EA ED 462 & CP 467

2 EA ED 551A & CP 467 ED 461, ED 462, & CP 470


Figure 1.1
CONTROL DISPLAY OPTIONS
CONTROL PANEL offered. Figure 1.1 depicts the
E F S 40/50 Control Display
The ED 461 Control/Display Unit Options.
incorporates the EHSI mode con-
troller in the bezel of the display, Regardless of which display unit
reducing the required panel and method of control is select-
space to 4” X 4”. For those instal- ed, the system’s performance will
lations that are not sensitive to be identical. Both mode con-
panel space, an independent dis- trollers offer a simple means for
play unit, ED 462, ED 551A, and the pilot to select the desired dis-
mode controller, CP 467, are play format, such as standard

1.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.3

System Configuration

compass rose or sectored com- will slew the heading bug to the
pass rose, 360-degree map or lubber line or the course pointer
sectored map and weather radar to the DIRECT TO course for the
overlay. Also incorporated on selected NAV sensor providing a
the mode controller is the course centered D-Bar. The CP 4 6 7
and heading select knobs with and CP 470 incorporate Decision
auto sync. The auto sync feature Height Set and Radio Altimeter
Test.

SYMBOL GENERATOR
The SG 464 EHSI/MFD-only The SG 464 or SG 465 with soft-
symbol generator is a remote- ware version 05 and above will
mounted processing unit pack- drive either the 4” X 4” (ED 461
aged in an ARINC 1/4 ATR short or 462) or 5” X 5” (ED 551A) dis-
form factor. The SG 4 6 5 plays. Software version 06 incor-
EADI/EHSI/MFD symbol genera- porates the capability to drive the
tor is a remote-mounted process- ED 551 display. The SG 464 is
ing unit packaged in an ARINC no longer available and has not
3/8 ATR short form factor. A ver- been produced with software ver-
sion of the SG 465 3/8 ATR short sions 08 or later.
symbol generator is offered with
EHSI/MFD-only provisions.

Figure 1.2
SG 464 AND SG 465 SYMBOL GENERATORS

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.3


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.4

System Configuration

Figure 1.3
TYPICAL EFS 40/50 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

1.4 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.5

System Configuration

EQUIPMENT INTERFACE &


OPERATING CONFIGURATION

The EFS 40/50 equipment inter- tion of a specific aircraft. Those


face and operating configuration pages referring to software con-
is established at the time of figuration versions not applicable
installation and certification. The to this aircraft are to be removed
following pages are provided to from this pilot’s guide.
document the certified configura-

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.5


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.6

System Configuration

SOFTWARE 04 CONFIGURATION PAGES

The EHSI, EADI, and Reversion software will display these pages. All
items will be identical among all 3 displays, however, the ADI will not
be able to show the rack configurations, instead it will show the config-
uration data coming from the HSI and the data in its own EEPROM.
The descriptions given in this section refer to side 1 (left side) as the
pilot’s side and side 2 (right side) as the co-pilot’s side.

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
2 ITEM
3 SG NUMBER _______________
4 SINGLE/DUAL _______________
5 DU TYPE _______________
6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 _______________
7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 _______________
8 RATE OF TURN _______________
9 ADF #1 _______________
10 ADF #2 _______________
11 VOR/ILS #1 _______________
12 VOR/ILS #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 02
2 ITEM
3 DME #1 _______________
4 DME #2 _______________
5 MLS #1 _______________
6 MLS #2 _______________
7 FMS #1 _______________
8 FMS #2 _______________
9 RNAV #1 _______________
10 RNAV #2 _______________
11 TACAN #1 _______________
12 TACAN #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

1.6 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.7

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 03
2 ITEM
3 VNAV _______________
4 RADAR ALT _______________
5 AFCS TYPE _______________
6 AFCS COMMAND BAR _______________
7 AFCS MODE ANN _______________
8 AIR DATA _______________
9 RADAR TYPE _______________
10 RADAR CTL PNL _______________
11 RADAR INDICATOR _______________
12 CHECKLIST _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 04
2 ITEM
3 JOYSTICK _______________
4 RADAR GRAPHICS _______________

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06
2 ITEM
3 VERT SCALE SIDE _______________
4 DCLTR GS ON BC _______________
5 SPARE _______________
6 DISPLAY WIND VEC _______________
7 DISPLAY DRIFT _______________
8 DG ONLY MODE _______________
9 DME DIST ONLY _______________
10 RADAR ONLY MODE _______________
11 HOVER MODE _______________
12 ..MORE..

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.7


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.8

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 07
2 ITEM
3 DISPLAY HDG TAPE _______________
4 COMMAND BARS _______________
5 ROLL INDICATOR _______________
6 DCLTR UNUS ATT _______________
7 CAT II AVAILABLE _______________
8 PERSPECTIVE LINES _______________
9 DH SELECT _______________
10 CABLE MODE _______________

1.8 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.9

System Configuration

SOFTWARE 05 CONFIGURATION PAGES

The EHSI, EADI, MFD and Reversion software will display the follow-
ing pages. All display information will be identical on the EHSI and
MFD, however, the EADI will not display the rack configurations, it will
display a comparison of the EHSI and EADI configuration data. The
descriptions given in this section refer to side 1 (left side) as the pilot’s
side and side 2 (right side) as the co-pilot’s side.

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
2 ITEM
3 SG NUMBER _______________
4 SINGLE/DUAL _______________
5 DU TYPE _______________
6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 _______________
7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 _______________
8 RATE OF TURN _______________
9 ADF #1 _______________
10 ADF #2 _______________
11 VOR/ILS #1 _______________
12 VOR/ILS #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 02
2 ITEM
3 DME #1 _______________
4 DME #2 _______________
5 MLS #1 _______________
6 MLS #2 _______________
7 FMS #1 _______________
8 FMS #2 _______________
9 RNAV #1 _______________
10 RNAV #2 _______________
11 TACAN #1 _______________
12 TACAN #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.9


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.10

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 03
2 ITEM
3 VNAV _______________
4 RADAR ALT _______________
5 AFCS TYPE _______________
6 AFCS COMMAND BAR _______________
7 AFCS MODE ANN _______________
8 AIR DATA _______________
9 RADAR TYPE _______________
10 RADAR CTL PNL _______________
11 RADAR INDICATOR _______________
12 CHECKLIST _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 04
2 ITEM
3 JOYSTICK _______________
4 RADAR GRAPHICS _______________
5 HOMING #1 _______________
6 HOMING #2 _______________

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06
2 ITEM
3 VERT SCALE SIDE _______________
4 DCLTR GS ON BC _______________
5 FULL TIME FMS MAP _______________
6 DISPLAY WIND VEC _______________
7 DISPLAY DRIFT _______________
8 DG ONLY MODE _______________
9 DME DIST ONLY _______________
10 RADAR ONLY MODE _______________
11 HOVER MODE _______________
12 MFD NAV CONTROL _______________
13 ..MORE..

1.10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.11

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 07
2 ITEM
3 DISPLAY HDG TAPE _______________
4 COMMAND BARS _______________
5 ROLL INDICATOR _______________
6 DCLTR UNUS ATT _______________
7 CAT II AVAILABLE _______________
8 PERSPECTIVE LINES _______________
9 DH SELECT _______________
10 CABLE MODE _______________
11 SEL HDG SYNC _______________
12 SEL CRS SYNC _______________

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.11


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.12

System Configuration

SOFTWARE 06 CONFIGURATION PAGES

The EHSI, EADI, MFD and Reversion software will display the follow-
ing pages. All display information will be identical on the EHSI and
MFD, however, the EADI will not display the rack configurations, it will
display a comparison of the EHSI and EADI configuration data. The
descriptions given in this section refer to side 1 (left side) as the pilot’s
side and side 2 (right side) as the co-pilot’s side.

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
2 ITEM
3 SG NUMBER _______________
4 SINGLE/DUAL _______________
5 DU TYPE _______________
6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 _______________
7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 _______________
8 RATE OF TURN _______________
9 ADF #1 _______________
10 ADF #2 _______________
11 VOR/ILS #1 _______________
12 VOR/ILS #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 02
2 ITEM
3 DME #1 _______________
4 DME #2 _______________
5 MLS #1 _______________
6 MLS #2 _______________
7 FMS #1 _______________
8 FMS #2 _______________
9 RNAV #1 _______________
10 RNAV #2 _______________
11 TACAN #1 _______________
12 TACAN #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

1.12 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.13

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 03
2 ITEM
3 VNAV _______________
4 RADAR ALT _______________
5 AFCS TYPE _______________
6 AFCS COMMAND BAR _______________
7 AFCS MODE ANN _______________
8 F/S AIR DATA _______________
9 RADAR TYPE _______________
10 RADAR CTL PNL _______________
11 RADAR INDICATOR _______________
12 CHECKLIST _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 04
2 ITEM
3 JOYSTICK _______________
4 TCAS _______________
5 HOMING #1 _______________
6 HOMING #2 _______________
7 LIGHTNING DET _______________

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06
2 ITEM
3 VERT SCALE SIDE _______________
4 DCLTR GS ON BC _______________
5 FULLTIME FMS MAP _______________
6 DISPLAY WIND VEC _______________
7 DISPLAY DRIFT _______________
8 DG ONLY MODE _______________
9 DME DIST ONLY _______________
10 RADAR ONLY MODE _______________
11 HOVER MODE _______________
12 MFD NAV CONTROL _______________
13 ..MORE..

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.13


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.14

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 07
2 ITEM
3 DISPLAY HDG TAPE _______________
4 COMMAND BARS _______________
5 ROLL INDICATOR _______________
6 DCLTR UNUS ATT _______________
7 CAT II AVAILABLE _______________
8 PERSPECTIVE LINES _______________
9 DH SELECT _______________
11 CABLE MODE _______________
11 SEL HDG SYNC _______________
12 SEL CRS SYNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 08
2 ITEM
3 NORTH UP MAP _______________
4 VERT PTR TYPE _______________
5 DISPLAY FMS MSG _______________
6 SEL HDG COLOR _______________
7 CMD BAR COLOR _______________
8 REV MODE ANN _______________
9 RISING RUNWAY _______________
10 ADI DEV SRC _______________
11 CMD BAR FILTER _______________

1.14 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.15

System Configuration

SOFTWARE 07 CONFIGURATION PAGES


(includes both 0701 and 0702)

The EHSI, EADI, MFD and Reversion software will display the follow-
ing pages. All display information will be identical on the EHSI and
MFD, however, the EADI will not display the rack configurations, it will
display a comparison of the EHSI and EADI configuration data. The
descriptions given in this section refer to side 1 (left side) as the pilot’s
side and side 2 (right side) as the co-pilot’s side.

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
2 ITEM
3 SG NUMBER _______________
4 SINGLE/DUAL _______________
5 DU TYPE _______________
6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 _______________
7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 _______________
8 RATE OF TURN _______________
9 ADF #1 _______________
10 ADF #2 _______________
11 VOR/ILS #1 _______________
12 VOR/ILS #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 02
2 ITEM
3 DME #1 _______________
4 DME #2 _______________
5 MLS #1 _______________
6 MLS #2 _______________
7 FMS #1 _______________
8 FMS #2 _______________
9 RNAV #1 _______________
10 RNAV #2 _______________
11 TACAN #1 _______________
12 TACAN #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.15


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.16

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 03
2 ITEM
3 VNAV _______________
4 RADAR ALT _______________
5 AFCS TYPE _______________
6 AFCS COMMAND BAR _______________
7 AFCS MODE ANN _______________
8 F/S AIR DATA _______________
9 RADAR TYPE _______________
10 RADAR CTL PNL _______________
11 RADAR INDICATOR _______________
12 CHECKLIST _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 04
2 ITEM
3 JOYSTICK _______________
4 TCAS _______________
5 HOMING #1 _______________
6 HOMING #2 _______________
7 LIGHTNING DET _______________
8 HOVER MODE _______________
9 CABLE MODE _______________

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06
2 ITEM
3 VERT SCALE SIDE _______________
4 DCLTR GS ON BC _______________
5 FULL TIME FMS MAP _______________
6 DISPLAY WIND VEC _______________
7 DISPLAY DRIFT _______________
8 DG ONLY MODE _______________
9 DME DIST ONLY _______________
10 RADAR ONLY MODE _______________
11 SPARE _______________
12 MFD NAV CONTROL _______________
13 ..MORE..

1.16 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.17

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 07
2 ITEM
3 DISPLAY HDG TAPE _______________
4 COMMAND BARS _______________
5 ROLL INDICATOR _______________
6 DCLTR UNUS ATT _______________
7 CAT II AVAILABLE _______________
8 PERSPECTIVE LINES _______________
9 DH SELECT _______________
10 CTL PNL SYNC _______________
11 SEL HDG SYNC _______________
12 SEL CRS SYNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 08
2 ITEM
3 NORTH UP MAP _______________
4 VERT PTR TYPE _______________
5 DISPLAY FMS MSG _______________
6 SEL HDG COLOR _______________
7 CMD BAR COLOR _______________
8 REV MODE ANN _______________
9 RISING RUNWAY _______________
10 ADI DEV SRC _______________
11 CMD BAR FILTER _______________

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.17


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.18

System Configuration

SOFTWARE 08 CONFIGURATION PAGES

The EHSI, EADI, MFD and Reversion software will display the follow-
ing pages. All display information will be identical on the EHSI and
MFD, however, the EADI will not display the rack configurations, it will
display a comparison of the EHSI and EADI configuration data. The
descriptions given in this section refer to side 1 as the pilot’s side and
side 2 as the co-pilot’s side.

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
2 ITEM
3 SG NUMBER _______________
4 SINGLE/DUAL _______________
5 DU TYPE _______________
6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 _______________
7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 _______________
8 RATE OF TURN _______________
9 ADF #1 _______________
10 ADF #2 _______________
11 VOR/ILS #1 _______________
12 VOR/ILS #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 02
2 ITEM
3 DME #1 _______________
4 DME #2 _______________
5 MLS #1 _______________
6 MLS #2 _______________
7 FMS #1 _______________
8 FMS #2 _______________
9 RNAV #1 _______________
10 RNAV #2 _______________
11 TACAN #1 _______________
12 TACAN #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

1.18 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.19

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 03
2 ITEM
3 FMS VNAV _______________
4 RADAR ALT _______________
5 AFCS TYPE _______________
6 AFCS COMMAND BAR _______________
7 AFCS MODE ANN _______________
8 F/S AIR DATA _______________
9 RADAR TYPE _______________
10 RADAR CTL PNL _______________
11 RADAR INDICATOR _______________
12 CHECKLIST _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 04
2 ITEM
3 JOYSTICK _______________
4 TCAS _______________
5 HOMING #1 _______________
6 HOMING #2 _______________
7 LIGHTNING DET _______________
8 HOVER MODE _______________
9 CABLE MODE _______________

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06
2 ITEM
3 VERT SCALE SIDE _______________
4 DCLTR GS ON BC _______________
5 FULL TIME FMS MAP _______________
6 DISPLAY WIND VEC _______________
7 DISPLAY DRIFT _______________
8 DG ONLY MODE _______________
9 DME DIST ONLY _______________
10 RADAR ONLY MODE _______________
11 SPARE _______________
12 MFD NAV CONTROL _______________
13 ..MORE..

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.19


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.20

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 07
2 ITEM
3 DISPLAY HDG TAPE _______________
4 COMMAND BARS _______________
5 ROLL INDICATOR _______________
6 DCLTR UNUS ATT _______________
7 CAT II AVAILABLE _______________
8 PERSPECTIVE LINES _______________
9 DH SELECT _______________
10 CTL PNL SYNC _______________
11 SEL HDG SYNC _______________
12 SEL CRS SYNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 08
2 ITEM
3 NORTH UP MAP _______________
4 VERT PTR TYPE _______________
5 DISPLAY FMS MSG _______________
6 SEL HDG COLOR _______________
7 CMD BAR COLOR _______________
8 REV MODE ANN _______________
9 RISING RUNWAY _______________
10 ADI DEV SRC _______________
11 CMD BAR FILTER _______________
12 MLS VRT ANNUNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 09
2 ITEM
3 DATUM SCALING _______________
4 HDG FAIL ANNUNC _______________
5 VNAV APR SCALE _______________
6 LNAV CRS CTRL _______________
7 SG #1 SIDE _______________
8 AIRCRAFT SYMBOL _______________
9 TACAN ANNUNC _______________
10 TCAS DISPLAYS _______________
11 CAT II SENSORS _______________

1.20 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.21

System Configuration

SOFTWARE 09 CONFIGURATION PAGES

The EHSI, EADI, MFD and Reversion software will display the follow-
ing pages. All display information will be identical on the EHSI and
MFD, however, the EADI will not display the rack configurations, it will
display a comparison of the EHSI and EADI configuration data. The
descriptions given in this section refer to side 1 as the pilot’s side and
side 2 as the co-pilot’s side.

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
2 ITEM
3 SG NUMBER _______________
4 SINGLE/DUAL _______________
5 DU TYPE _______________
6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 _______________
7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 _______________
8 RATE OF TURN _______________
9 ADF #1 _______________
10 ADF #2 _______________
11 VOR/ILS #1 _______________
12 VOR/ILS #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 02
2 ITEM
3 DME #1 _______________
4 DME #2 _______________
5 MLS #1 _______________
6 MLS #2 _______________
7 FMS #1 _______________
8 FMS #2 _______________
9 RNAV #1 _______________
10 RNAV #2 _______________
11 TACAN #1 _______________
12 TACAN #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.21


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.22

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 03
2 ITEM
3 FMS VNAV _______________
4 RADAR ALT _______________
5 AFCS TYPE _______________
6 AFCS COMMAND BAR _______________
7 AFCS MODE ANN _______________
8 F/S AIR DATA _______________
9 RADAR TYPE _______________
10 RADAR CTL PNL _______________
11 RADAR INDICATOR _______________
12 CHECKLIST _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 04
2 ITEM
3 JOYSTICK _______________
4 TCAS _______________
5 HOMING #1 _______________
6 HOMING #2 _______________
7 LIGHTNING DET _______________
8 HOVER MODE _______________
9 CABLE MODE _______________

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06
2 ITEM
3 VERT SCALE SIDE _______________
4 DCLTR GS ON BC _______________
5 FULL TIME FMS MAP _______________
6 DISPLAY WIND VEC _______________
7 DISPLAY DRIFT _______________
8 DG ONLY MODE _______________
9 DME DIST ONLY _______________
10 RADAR ONLY MODE _______________
11 SPARE _______________
12 MFD NAV CONTROL _______________
13 ..MORE..

1.22 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.23

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 07
2 ITEM
3 DISPLAY HDG TAPE _______________
4 ADI PLANE/CMD BAR _______________
5 ROLL INDICATOR _______________
6 DCLTR UNUS ATT _______________
7 CAT II AVAILABLE _______________
8 PERSPECTIVE LINES _______________
9 DH SELECT _______________
10 CTL PNL SYNC _______________
11 SEL HDG SYNC _______________
12 SEL CRS SYNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 08
2 ITEM
3 NORTH UP MAP _______________
4 VERT PTR TYPE _______________
5 DISPLAY FMS MSG _______________
6 SEL HDG COLOR _______________
7 CMD BAR COLOR _______________
8 REV MODE ANN _______________
9 RISING RUNWAY _______________
10 ADI DEV SRC _______________
11 CMD BAR FILTER _______________
12 MLS VRT ANNUNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 09
2 ITEM
3 DATUM SCALING _______________
4 HDG FAIL ANNUNC _______________
5 VNAV APR SCALE _______________
6 LNAV CRS CTRL _______________
7 SG #1 SIDE _______________
8 AIRCRAFT SYMBOL _______________
9 TACAN ANNUNC _______________
10 TCAS DISPLAYS _______________
11 CAT II SENSORS _______________
12 RADAR SCAN _______________

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.23


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.24

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 10
2 ITEM
3 RADAR SDI _______________

1.24 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.25

System Configuration

SOFTWARE 10 CONFIGURATION PAGES

The EHSI, EADI, MFD and Reversion software will display the follow-
ing pages. All display information will be identical on the EHSI and
MFD, however, the EADI will not display the rack configurations, it will
display a comparison of the EHSI and EADI configuration data. The
descriptions given in this section refer to side 1 as the pilot’s side and
side 2 as the co-pilot’s side.

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
2 ITEM
3 SG NUMBER _______________
4 SINGLE/DUAL _______________
5 DU TYPE _______________
6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 _______________
7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 _______________
8 RATE OF TURN _______________
9 ADF #1 _______________
10 ADF #2 _______________
11 VOR/ILS #1 _______________
12 VOR/ILS #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 02
2 ITEM
3 DME #1 _______________
4 DME #2 _______________
5 MLS #1 _______________
6 MLS #2 _______________
7 FMS #1 _______________
8 FMS #2 _______________
9 RNAV #1 _______________
10 RNAV #2 _______________
11 TACAN #1 _______________
12 TACAN #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.25


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.26

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 03
2 ITEM
3 FMS VNAV _______________
4 RADAR ALT _______________
5 AFCS TYPE _______________
6 AFCS COMMAND BAR _______________
7 AFCS MODE ANN _______________
8 F/S AIR DATA _______________
9 RADAR TYPE _______________
10 RADAR CTL PNL _______________
11 RADAR INDICATOR _______________
12 CHECKLIST _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 04
2 ITEM
3 JOYSTICK _______________
4 TCAS _______________
5 HOMING #1 _______________
6 HOMING #2 _______________
7 LIGHTNING DET _______________
8 HOVER MODE _______________
9 CABLE MODE _______________

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06
2 ITEM
3 VERT SCALE SIDE _______________
4 DCLTR GS ON BC _______________
5 FULL TIME FMS MAP _______________
6 DISPLAY WIND VEC _______________
7 DISPLAY DRIFT _______________
8 DG ONLY MODE _______________
9 DME DIST ONLY _______________
10 RADAR ONLY MODE _______________
11 SPARE _______________
12 MFD NAV CONTROL _______________
13 ..MORE..

1.26 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.27

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 07
2 ITEM
3 DISPLAY HDG TAPE _______________
4 ADI PLANE/CMD BAR _______________
5 ROLL INDICATOR _______________
6 DCLTR UNUS ATT _______________
7 CAT II AVAILABLE _______________
8 PERSPECTIVE LINES _______________
9 DH SELECT _______________
10 CTL PNL SYNC _______________
11 SEL HDG SYNC _______________
12 SEL CRS SYNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 08
2 ITEM
3 NORTH UP MAP _______________
4 VERT PTR TYPE _______________
5 DISPLAY FMS MSG _______________
6 SEL HDG COLOR _______________
7 CMD BAR COLOR _______________
8 REV MODE ANN _______________
9 RISING RUNWAY _______________
10 ADI DEV SRC _______________
11 CMD BAR FILTER _______________
12 MLS VRT ANNUNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 09
2 ITEM
3 DATUM SCALING _______________
4 HDG FAIL ANNUNC _______________
5 VNAV APR SCALE _______________
6 LNAV CRS CTRL _______________
7 SG #1 SIDE _______________
8 AIRCRAFT SYMBOL _______________
9 TACAN ANNUNC _______________
10 TCAS DISPLAYS _______________
11 CAT II SENSORS _______________
12 RADAR SCAN _______________

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.27


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.28

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 10
2 ITEM
3 RADAR SDI _______________
4 PITCH SYNC DISC _______________

1.28 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.29

System Configuration

SOFTWARE 11 CONFIGURATION PAGES

The EHSI, EADI, MFD and Reversion software will display the follow-
ing pages. All display information will be identical on the EHSI and
MFD, however, the EADI will not display the rack configurations, it will
display a comparison of the EHSI and EADI configuration data. The
descriptions given in this section refer to side 1 as the pilot’s side and
side 2 as the co-pilot’s side.

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
2 ITEM
3 SG NUMBER _______________
4 SINGLE/DUAL _______________
5 DU TYPE _______________
6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 _______________
7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 _______________
8 RATE OF TURN _______________
9 ADF #1 _______________
10 ADF #2 _______________
11 VOR/ILS #1 _______________
12 VOR/ILS #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 02
2 ITEM
3 DME #1 _______________
4 DME #2 _______________
5 MLS #1 _______________
6 MLS #2 _______________
7 FMS #1 _______________
8 FMS #2 _______________
9 RNAV #1 _______________
10 RNAV #2 _______________
11 TACAN #1 _______________
12 TACAN #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.29


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.30

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 03
2 ITEM
3 FMS VNAV _______________
4 RADAR ALT _______________
5 AFCS TYPE _______________
6 AFCS COMMAND BAR _______________
7 AFCS MODE ANN _______________
8 F/S AIR DATA _______________
9 RADAR TYPE _______________
10 RADAR CTL PNL _______________
11 RADAR INDICATOR _______________
12 CHECKLIST _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 04
2 ITEM
3 JOYSTICK _______________
4 TCAS _______________
5 HOMING #1 _______________
6 HOMING #2 _______________
7 LIGHTNING DET _______________
8 HOVER MODE _______________
9 CABLE MODE _______________
10 VARIABLE LNAV _______________

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06
2 ITEM
3 VERT SCALE SIDE _______________
4 DCLTR GS ON BC _______________
5 FULL TIME FMS MAP _______________
6 DISPLAY WIND VEC _______________
7 DISPLAY DRIFT _______________
8 DG ONLY MODE _______________
9 DME DIST ONLY _______________
10 RADAR ONLY MODE _______________
11 SPARE _______________
12 MFD NAV CONTROL _______________
13 ..MORE..

1.30 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.31

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 07
2 ITEM
3 DISPLAY HDG TAPE _______________
4 ADI PLANE/CMD BAR _______________
5 ROLL INDICATOR _______________
6 DCLTR UNUS ATT _______________
7 CAT II AVAILABLE _______________
8 PERSPECTIVE LINES _______________
9 DH SELECT _______________
10 CTL PNL SYNC _______________
11 SEL HDG SYNC _______________
12 SEL CRS SYNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 08
2 ITEM
3 NORTH UP MAP _______________
4 VERT PTR TYPE _______________
5 DISPLAY FMS MSG _______________
6 SEL HDG COLOR _______________
7 CMD BAR COLOR _______________
8 REV MODE ANN _______________
9 RISING RUNWAY _______________
10 ADI DEV SRC _______________
11 CMD BAR FILTER _______________
12 MLS VRT ANNUNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 09
2 ITEM
3 DATUM SCALING _______________
4 HDG FAIL ANNUNC _______________
5 VNAV APR SCALE _______________
6 LNAV CRS CTRL _______________
7 SG #1 SIDE _______________
8 AIRCRAFT SYMBOL _______________
9 TACAN ANNUNC _______________
10 TCAS DISPLAYS _______________
11 CAT II SENSORS _______________
12 RADAR SCAN _______________

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.31


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.32

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 10
2 ITEM
3 RADAR SDI _______________

1.32 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.33

System Configuration

SOFTWARE 12 CONFIGURATION PAGES

The EHSI, EADI, MFD and Reversion software will display the follow-
ing pages. All display information will be identical on the EHSI and
MFD, however, the EADI will not display the rack configurations, it will
display a comparison of the EHSI and EADI configuration data. The
descriptions given in this section refer to side 1 as the pilot’s side and
side 2 as the co-pilot’s side.

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
2 ITEM
3 SG NUMBER _______________
4 SINGLE/DUAL _______________
5 DU TYPE _______________
6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 _______________
7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 _______________
8 RATE OF TURN _______________
9 ADF #1 _______________
10 ADF #2 _______________
11 VOR/ILS #1 _______________
12 VOR/ILS #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 02
2 ITEM
3 DME #1 _______________
4 DME #2 _______________
5 MLS #1 _______________
6 MLS #2 _______________
7 FMS #1 _______________
8 FMS #2 _______________
9 RNAV #1 _______________
10 RNAV #2 _______________
11 TACAN #1 _______________
12 TACAN #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.33


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.34

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 03
2 ITEM
3 FMS VNAV _______________
4 RADAR ALT _______________
5 AFCS TYPE _______________
6 AFCS COMMAND BAR _______________
7 AFCS MODE ANN _______________
8 F/S AIR DATA _______________
9 RADAR TYPE _______________
10 RADAR CTL PNL _______________
11 RADAR INDICATOR _______________
12 CHECKLIST _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 04
2 ITEM
3 JOYSTICK _______________
4 TCAS _______________
5 HOMING #1 _______________
6 HOMING #2 _______________
7 LIGHTNING DET _______________
8 HOVER MODE _______________
9 CABLE MODE _______________
10 VARIABLE LNAV _______________

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06
2 ITEM
3 VERT SCALE SIDE _______________
4 DCLTR GS ON BC _______________
5 FULL TIME FMS MAP _______________
6 DISPLAY WIND VEC _______________
7 DISPLAY DRIFT _______________
8 DG ONLY MODE _______________
9 DME DIST ONLY _______________
10 RADAR ONLY MODE _______________
11 SPARE _______________
12 MFD NAV CONTROL _______________
13 ..MORE..

1.34 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.35

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 07
2 ITEM
3 DISPLAY HDG TAPE _______________
4 ADI PLANE/CMD BAR _______________
5 ROLL INDICATOR _______________
6 DCLTR UNUS ATT _______________
7 CAT II AVAILABLE _______________
8 PERSPECTIVE LINES _______________
9 DH SELECT _______________
10 CTL PNL SYNC _______________
11 SEL HDG SYNC _______________
12 SEL CRS SYNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 08
2 ITEM
3 NORTH UP MAP _______________
4 VERT PTR TYPE _______________
5 DISPLAY FMS MSG _______________
6 SEL HDG COLOR _______________
7 CMD BAR COLOR _______________
8 REV MODE ANN _______________
9 RISING RUNWAY _______________
10 ADI DEV SRC _______________
11 CMD BAR FILTER _______________
12 MLS VRT ANNUNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 09
2 ITEM
3 DATUM SCALING _______________
4 HDG FAIL ANNUNC _______________
5 VNAV APR SCALE _______________
6 LNAV CRS CTRL _______________
7 SG #1 SIDE _______________
8 AIRCRAFT SYMBOL _______________
9 TACAN ANNUNC _______________
10 TCAS DISPLAYS _______________
11 CAT II SENSORS _______________
12 RADAR SCAN _______________

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.35


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.36

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 10
2 ITEM
3 RADAR SDI _______________

1.36 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.37

System Configuration

SOFTWARE 13 CONFIGURATION PAGES

The EHSI, EADI, MFD and Reversion software will display the follow-
ing pages. All display information will be identical on the EHSI and
MFD, however, the EADI will not display the rack configurations, it will
display a comparison of the EHSI and EADI configuration data. The
descriptions given in this section refer to side 1 as the pilot’s side and
side 2 as the co-pilot’s side.

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
2 ITEM
3 SG NUMBER _______________
4 SINGLE/DUAL _______________
5 DU TYPE _______________
6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 _______________
7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 _______________
8 RATE OF TURN _______________
9 ADF #1 _______________
10 ADF #2 _______________
11 VOR/ILS #1 _______________
12 VOR/ILS #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 02
2 ITEM
3 DME #1 _______________
4 DME #2 _______________
5 MLS #1 _______________
6 MLS #2 _______________
7 FMS #1 _______________
8 FMS #2 _______________
9 RNAV #1 _______________
10 RNAV #2 _______________
11 TACAN #1 _______________
12 TACAN #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.37


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.38

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 03
2 ITEM
3 FMS VNAV _______________
4 RADAR ALT _______________
5 AFCS TYPE _______________
6 AFCS COMMAND BAR _______________
7 AFCS MODE ANN _______________
8 F/S AIR DATA _______________
9 RADAR TYPE _______________
10 RADAR CTL PNL _______________
11 RADAR INDICATOR _______________
12 CHECKLIST _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 04
2 ITEM
3 JOYSTICK _______________
4 TCAS _______________
5 HOMING #1 _______________
6 HOMING #2 _______________
7 LIGHTNING DET _______________
8 HOVER MODE _______________
9 CABLE MODE _______________
10 VARIABLE LNAV _______________

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06
2 ITEM
3 VERT SCALE SIDE _______________
4 DCLTR GS ON BC _______________
5 FULL TIME FMS MAP _______________
6 DISPLAY WIND VEC _______________
7 DISPLAY DRIFT _______________
8 DG ONLY MODE _______________
9 DME DIST ONLY _______________
10 RADAR ONLY MODE _______________
11 SPARE _______________
12 MFD NAV CONTROL _______________
13 ..MORE..

1.38 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.39

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 07
2 ITEM
3 DISPLAY HDG TAPE _______________
4 ADI PLANE/CMD BAR _______________
5 ROLL INDICATOR _______________
6 DCLTR UNUS ATT _______________
7 CAT II AVAILABLE _______________
8 PERSPECTIVE LINES _______________
9 DH SELECT _______________
10 CTL PNL SYNC _______________
11 SEL HDG SYNC _______________
12 SEL CRS SYNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 08
2 ITEM
3 NORTH UP MAP _______________
4 VERT PTR TYPE _______________
5 DISPLAY FMS MSG _______________
6 SEL HDG COLOR _______________
7 CMD BAR COLOR _______________
8 REV MODE ANN _______________
9 RISING RUNWAY _______________
10 ADI DEV SRC _______________
11 CMD BAR FILTER _______________
12 MLS VRT ANNUNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 09
2 ITEM
3 DATUM SCALING _______________
4 HDG FAIL ANNUNC _______________
5 VNAV APR SCALE _______________
6 LNAV CRS CTRL _______________
7 SG #1 SIDE _______________
8 AIRCRAFT SYMBOL _______________
9 TACAN ANNUNC _______________
10 TCAS DISPLAYS _______________
11 CAT II SENSORS _______________
12 RADAR SCAN _______________

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.39


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.40

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 10
2 ITEM
3 RADAR SDI _______________
4 PITCH SYNC DISC _______________
5 ADF PTR HOLD DST _______________

1.40 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.41

System Configuration

SOFTWARE 14 CONFIGURATION PAGES

The EHSI, EADI, MFD and Reversion software will display the follow-
ing pages. All display information will be identical on the EHSI and
MFD, however, the EADI will not display the rack configurations, it will
display a comparison of the EHSI and EADI configuration data. The
descriptions given in this section refer to side 1 as the pilot’s side and
side 2 as the co-pilot’s side.

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
2 ITEM
3 SG NUMBER _______________
4 SINGLE/DUAL _______________
5 DU TYPE _______________
6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 _______________
7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 _______________
8 RATE OF TURN _______________
9 ADF #1 _______________
10 ADF #2 _______________
11 VOR/ILS #1 _______________
12 VOR/ILS #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 02
2 ITEM
3 DME #1 _______________
4 DME #2 _______________
5 MLS #1 _______________
6 MLS #2 _______________
7 FMS #1 _______________
8 FMS #2 _______________
9 RNAV #1 _______________
10 RNAV #2 _______________
11 TACAN #1 _______________
12 TACAN #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.41


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.42

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 03
2 ITEM
3 FMS VNAV _______________
4 RADAR ALT _______________
5 AFCS TYPE _______________
6 AFCS COMMAND BAR _______________
7 AFCS MODE ANN _______________
8 F/S AIR DATA _______________
9 RADAR TYPE _______________
10 RADAR CTL PNL _______________
11 RADAR INDICATOR _______________
12 CHECKLIST _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 04
2 ITEM
3 JOYSTICK _______________
4 TCAS _______________
5 HOMING #1 _______________
6 HOMING #2 _______________
7 LIGHTNING DET _______________
8 HOVER MODE _______________
9 CABLE MODE _______________
10 VARIABLE LNAV _______________
11 EGPWS _______________

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06
2 ITEM
3 VERT SCALE SIDE _______________
4 DCLTR GS ON BC _______________
5 FULL TIME FMS MAP _______________
6 DISPLAY WIND VEC _______________
7 DISPLAY DRIFT _______________
8 DG ONLY MODE _______________
9 DME DIST ONLY _______________
10 RADAR ONLY MODE _______________
11 SPARE _______________
12 MFD NAV CONTROL _______________
13 ..MORE..

1.42 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.43

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 07
2 ITEM
3 DISPLAY HDG TAPE _______________
4 ADI PLANE/CMD BAR _______________
5 ROLL INDICATOR _______________
6 DCLTR UNUS ATT _______________
7 CAT II AVAILABLE _______________
8 PERSPECTIVE LINES _______________
9 DH SELECT _______________
10 CTL PNL SYNC _______________
11 SEL HDG SYNC _______________
12 SEL CRS SYNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 08
2 ITEM
3 NORTH UP MAP _______________
4 VERT PTR TYPE _______________
5 DISPLAY FMS MSG _______________
6 SEL HDG COLOR _______________
7 CMD BAR COLOR _______________
8 REV MODE ANN _______________
9 RISING RUNWAY _______________
10 ADI DEV SRC _______________
11 CMD BAR FILTER _______________
12 MLS VRT ANNUNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 09
2 ITEM
3 DATUM SCALING _______________
4 HDG FAIL ANNUNC _______________
5 VNAV APR SCALE _______________
6 LNAV CRS CTRL _______________
7 SG #1 SIDE _______________
8 AIRCRAFT SYMBOL _______________
9 TACAN ANNUNC _______________
10 TCAS DISPLAYS _______________
11 CAT II SENSORS _______________
12 RADAR SCAN _______________

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.43


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.44

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 10
2 ITEM
3 RADAR SDI _______________
4 PITCH SYNC DISC _______________
5 ADF PTR HOLD DST _______________
6 FMS OUTPUT BUS _______________

1.44 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.45

System Configuration

SOFTWARE 15 CONFIGURATION PAGES

The EHSI, EADI, MFD and Reversion software will display the follow-
ing pages. All display information will be identical on the EHSI and
MFD, however, the EADI will not display the rack configurations, it will
display a comparison of the EHSI and EADI configuration data. The
descriptions given in this section refer to side 1 as the pilot’s side and
side 2 as the co-pilot’s side.

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
2 ITEM
3 SG NUMBER _______________
4 SINGLE/DUAL _______________
5 DU TYPE _______________
6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 _______________
7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 _______________
8 RATE OF TURN _______________
9 ADF #1 _______________
10 ADF #2 _______________
11 VOR/ILS #1 _______________
12 VOR/ILS #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 02
2 ITEM
3 DME #1 _______________
4 DME #2 _______________
5 MLS #1 _______________
6 MLS #2 _______________
7 FMS #1 _______________
8 FMS #2 _______________
9 RNAV #1 _______________
10 RNAV #2 _______________
11 TACAN #1 _______________
12 TACAN #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.45


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.46

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 03
2 ITEM
3 FMS VNAV _______________
4 RADAR ALT _______________
5 AFCS TYPE _______________
6 AFCS COMMAND BAR _______________
7 AFCS MODE ANN _______________
8 F/S AIR DATA _______________
9 RADAR TYPE _______________
10 RADAR CTL PNL _______________
11 RADAR INDICATOR _______________
12 CHECKLIST _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 04
2 ITEM
3 JOYSTICK _______________
4 TCAS _______________
5 HOMING #1 _______________
6 HOMING #2 _______________
7 LIGHTNING DET _______________
8 HOVER MODE _______________
9 CABLE MODE _______________
10 VARIABLE LNAV _______________
11 EGPWS _______________
12 VARIABLE VNAV _______________

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06
2 ITEM
3 VERT SCALE SIDE _______________
4 DCLTR GS ON BC _______________
5 FULL TIME FMS MAP _______________
6 DISPLAY WIND VEC _______________
7 DISPLAY DRIFT _______________
8 DG ONLY MODE _______________
9 DME DIST ONLY _______________
10 RADAR ONLY MODE _______________
11 SPARE _______________
12 MFD NAV CONTROL _______________
13 ..MORE..

1.46 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.47

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 07
2 ITEM
3 DISPLAY HDG TAPE _______________
4 ADI PLANE/CMD BAR _______________
5 ROLL INDICATOR _______________
6 DCLTR UNUS ATT _______________
7 CAT II AVAILABLE _______________
8 PERSPECTIVE LINES _______________
9 DH SELECT _______________
10 CTL PNL SYNC _______________
11 SEL HDG SYNC _______________
12 SEL CRS SYNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 08
2 ITEM
3 NORTH UP MAP _______________
4 VERT PTR TYPE _______________
5 DISPLAY FMS MSG _______________
6 SEL HDG COLOR _______________
7 CMD BAR COLOR _______________
8 REV MODE ANN _______________
9 RISING RUNWAY _______________
10 ADI DEV SRC _______________
11 CMD BAR FILTER _______________
12 MLS VRT ANNUNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 09
2 ITEM
3 DATUM SCALING _______________
4 HDG FAIL ANNUNC _______________
5 VNAV APR SCALE _______________
6 LNAV CRS CTRL _______________
7 SG #1 SIDE _______________
8 AIRCRAFT SYMBOL _______________
9 TACAN ANNUNC _______________
10 TCAS DISPLAYS _______________
11 CAT II SENSORS _______________
12 RADAR SCAN _______________

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.47


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.48

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 10
2 ITEM
3 RADAR SDI _______________
4 PITCH SYNC DISC _______________
5 ADF PTR HOLD DST _______________
6 FMS OUTPUT BUS _______________
7 LNAV VERT APR _______________
8 L/VNAV VERT APR _______________
9 LP VERT APR _______________
10 LPV VERT APR _______________
11 LNAV SELECT OUT _______________

1.48 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.49

System Configuration

SOFTWARE 16 CONFIGURATION PAGES

The EHSI, EADI, MFD and Reversion software will display the follow-
ing pages. All display information will be identical on the EHSI and
MFD, however, the EADI will not display the rack configurations, it will
display a comparison of the EHSI and EADI configuration data. The
descriptions given in this section refer to side 1 as the pilot’s side and
side 2 as the co-pilot’s side.

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
2 ITEM
3 SG NUMBER _______________
4 SINGLE/DUAL _______________
5 DU TYPE _______________
6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 _______________
7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 _______________
8 RATE OF TURN _______________
9 ADF #1 _______________
10 ADF #2 _______________
11 VOR/ILS #1 _______________
12 VOR/ILS #2 _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 02
2 ITEM
3 DME #1 _______________
4 DME #2 _______________
5 MLS #1 _______________
6 MLS #2 _______________
7 FMS #1 _______________
8 FMS #2 _______________
9 RNAV #1 _______________
10 RNAV #2 _______________
11 TACAN #1 _______________
12 TACAN #2 _______________

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.49


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.50

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 03
2 ITEM
3 FMS VNAV _______________
4 RADAR ALT _______________
5 AFCS TYPE _______________
6 AFCS COMMAND BAR _______________
7 AFCS MODE ANN _______________
8 F/S AIR DATA _______________
9 RADAR TYPE _______________
10 RADAR CTL PNL _______________
11 RADAR INDICATOR _______________
12 CHECKLIST _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 04
2 ITEM
3 JOYSTICK _______________
4 TCAS _______________
5 HOMING #1 _______________
6 HOMING #2 _______________
7 LIGHTNING DET _______________
8 HOVER MODE _______________
9 CABLE MODE _______________
10 VARIABLE LNAV _______________
11 EGPWS _______________
12 VARIABLE VNAV _______________

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06
2 ITEM
3 VERT SCALE SIDE _______________
4 DCLTR GS ON BC _______________
5 FULL TIME FMS MAP _______________
6 DISPLAY WIND VEC _______________
7 DISPLAY DRIFT _______________
8 DG ONLY MODE _______________
9 DME DIST ONLY _______________
10 RADAR ONLY MODE _______________
11 SPARE _______________
12 MFD NAV CONTROL _______________
13 ..MORE..

1.50 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.51

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 07
2 ITEM
3 DISPLAY HDG TAPE _______________
4 ADI PLANE/CMD BAR _______________
5 ROLL INDICATOR _______________
6 DCLTR UNUS ATT _______________
7 CAT II AVAILABLE _______________
8 PERSPECTIVE LINES _______________
9 DH SELECT _______________
10 CTL PNL SYNC _______________
11 SEL HDG SYNC _______________
12 SEL CRS SYNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 08
2 ITEM
3 NORTH UP MAP _______________
4 VERT PTR TYPE _______________
5 DISPLAY FMS MSG _______________
6 SEL HDG COLOR _______________
7 CMD BAR COLOR _______________
8 REV MODE ANN _______________
9 RISING RUNWAY _______________
10 ADI DEV SRC _______________
11 CMD BAR FILTER _______________
12 MLS VRT ANNUNC _______________
13 ..MORE..

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 09
2 ITEM
3 DATUM SCALING _______________
4 HDG FAIL ANNUNC _______________
5 VNAV APR SCALE _______________
6 LNAV CRS CTRL _______________
7 SG #1 SIDE _______________
8 AIRCRAFT SYMBOL _______________
9 TACAN ANNUNC _______________
10 TCAS DISPLAYS _______________
11 CAT II SENSORS _______________
12 RADAR SCAN _______________

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 1.51


Section 1mp 9/8/10 7:45 PM Page 1.52

System Configuration

——————————|
1 VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PG 10
2 ITEM
3 RADAR SDI _______________
4 PITCH SYNC DISC _______________
5 ADF PTR HOLD DST _______________
6 FMS OUTPUT BUS _______________
7 LNAV VERT APR _______________
8 L/VNAV VERT APR _______________
9 LP VERT APR _______________
10 LPV VERT APR _______________
11 LNAV SELECT OUT _______________

1.52 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 2.1mp 9/8/10 7:46 PM Page 2.1.1

EHSI Operation

EHSI OPERATION
DETAILED OPERATING CONTROLS
All possible EFS 40/50 Interfac- the ED 461 control display unit,
ing Equipment is described in the CP 468 EHSI control panel and
Detailed Operating Controls sec- the EHSI section of the CP 467
tion of the EFS 40/50 Pilot’s EHSI/EADI control panel. The
Guide, however, all may not be EADI operation of the CP 467 is
active in a specific installation. covered in section 2.2, EADI
Operation. The CP 466A/B radar
This section, EHSI Operation, will control panels are covered in
describe the operation of both section 2.3, RADAR Operation.

Figure 2.1
ED 461 EHSI

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/162.1.1


Section 2.1mp 9/8/10 7:46 PM Page 2.1.2

EHSI Operation

Figure 2.2
ED 462 Display Unit & Companion
CP 468 Control Panel

For clarification on a particular control/display unit and figure 2.2


display or operational feature, shows the CP 468 dedicated
refer to section IV. EHSI DIS- stand-alone EHSI mode con-
PLAYS or section V. OPERAT- troller and companion ED 462
ING INSTRUCTIONS. Figure display unit.
2.1 shows the ED 461 combined

2.1.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 2.1mp 9/8/10 7:46 PM Page 2.1.3

EHSI Operation

EHSI CONTROLS (ED 461 & CP 467/468)


1-2 NAVIGATION NAV NAVIGATION
SYSTEM SELECT SENSOR SELECT

1 N
1-2 2 NAV A
V

The 1-2 button is used to cycle During installation, the EFS


between primary navigation sen- 40/50 symbol generator was pro-
sor system #1 and #2 for display. grammed with the type and
The primary NAV system select- quantity of each piece of interfac-
ed is annunciated as sensor 1 or ing equipment. Not all the
sensor 2 on the EHSI. Example, equipment interfaced to the EFS
if VOR 1 is being displayed and 40/50 is usable for primary navi-
the 1-2 button is pressed, VOR 2 gation. The EFS 40/50 creates
will become the displayed sen- and maintains in permanent
sor. If only one sensor is memory a list of the interfacing
installed, the display will not cycle navigation sensors.
and the sensor annunciation will
not show a system number. For The NAV push button is used to
example ADF would be displayed select which NAV sensor pro-
(not ADF 1) in installations con- vides primary navigation data. A
taining a single ADF. press of the NAV sensor select
button sequentially selects the
Note: The cross-side sensor for next available sensor from the list
VOR could be TCN, for LNAVs of those installed. Primary Navi-
it could be a combination of gation Data is defined as the dis-
FM S, GPS, OMG or LOR. tance in the upper right corner,
Beginning with software 08, selected course, course pointer
the 1-2 button no longer and deviation.
selects between unlike LNAV
sources.

Software release 0402 added


“FUNCTION NOT IM PLE -
MENTED” annunciation when
either the 1-2, RMI or NAV
sensor select button is pressed
and it is not active in the sys -
tem. A yellow FUNCTION
NOT IMPLEMENTED will be
displayed in the center of the
screen.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/162.1.3


Section 2.1mp 9/8/10 7:46 PM Page 2.1.4

EHSI Operation

The Primary Navigation Sensor color scheme, green for on-side


is annunciated at the side of the approach navigation data, cyan
display unit opposite the vertical for on-side non approach naviga-
scale. Only those sensors inter- tion data and yellow for off-side
faced to the EFS 40/50 in a spe- navigation data.
cific installation will be selectable
for use and display. Software 04 added two new heli-
copter navigation sensor options,
For installations with dual Doppler (DOPP) and Cable
VOR/ILS receivers and a KNS (CAB). These sensors require
81, the KNS 81 will be pro- unique display formats, therefore
grammed as an RNAV. The when they are selected for dis-
annunciation displayed on the play their unique format will be
EHSI for this configuration will be presented and are not change-
NAV and will not change as able by the HSI or ARC button.
modes on the KNS 81 are
changed. The sensor annuncia- The following is an all-inclusive
tion and associated navigation list, in order, of primary naviga-
data colors will change to match tion sensors that may be inter-
the normal enroute or approach faced with the EFS 40/50:

ON-SIDE EFS CROSS-SIDE EFS


ON-SIDE EFS CROSS-SIDE EFS

VOR (VOR, LOC, TCN or RNV) 1-2 VOR (VOR, LOC, TCN or RNV)
VOR (VOR, LOC, TCN or RNV) 1-2 VOR (VOR, LOC, TCN or RNV)

NAV NAV NAV NAV

TCN (Control head) 1-2 TCN (Control head)


TCN (Control head) 1-2 TCN (Control head)

NAV NAV
NAV NAV

LNAV, (FMS, LOR, OMG or GPS)


LNAV, (FMS, LOR or OMG) 1-2 LNAV, (FMS, LOR or OMG)

NAV NAV
NAV

1-2 NAV (KNS 81 ONLY) LNAV, (FMS, LOR, OMG or GPS)


NAV (KNS 81 ONLY)

NAV NAV
NAV
N
A 1-2 MLS NAV (KNS 81 ONLY) 1-2 NAV (KNS 81 ONLY)
MLS
V
NAV NAV
NAV NAV
N
1-2 ADF A 1-2 MLS
MLS
ADF V

NAV NAV
NAV NAV
1-2 ADF
ADF
DOPP

NAV NAV
NAV

DOPP
CAB

NAV
NAV
1-2 HOM
CAB
HOM

NAV
NAV
1-2 HOM
HOM

NAV

SOFTWARE 04/05/06/07 SOFTWARE 08 OR LATER

2.1.4 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 2.1mp 9/8/10 7:46 PM Page 2.1.5

EHSI Operation

See Section 4 for display details The display selection list may
on Doppler, Cable and Homing. include the following:

Note: If a number 2 NAV sen -


sor has been selected for dis -
play on the number 1 EHSI by
pressing the 1-2 button and
the number 1 EHSI NAV push
button is pressed, the next
available number 1 NAV sen -
sor will be selected.

ADF D-Bar presentation may


not be available if the ADF
does not provide a suitable
flag output.

Soft ware 08 treats unlike


LNAV sources (i.e. FMS, LOR,
OMG, or GPS) as single sen -
sors. When two unlike LNAV DG and WEATHER are options
sources are configured, the selected at the time of installation
EFS will display both the on- and are included in the system
side LNAV and the off-side certification. Software 06 added
LANV without a system num - lightning detection presentation.
ber and the NAV button is
used to select between them. If a compatible weather radar or
lightning detection is not
HSI 360° MODE installed, the weather option will
SELECTION not be in the sequence.

H Software release 05 added a


HSI S Heading Bug to the DG mode.
I
Primary use of this display format
is for training or as an option to
The EFS 40/50 EHSI has four provide an uncluttered display for
possible 360-degree display for- an NDB approach (using the
mats: standard HSI compass EHSI as an ADF RMI).
rose, NAV map, NAV map with
weather, and DG mode. Each Software release 07 provides the
press of the HSI button sequen- additional, optional display format
tially selects the next display for- of "Plan View" which can be con-
mat. A press of the HSI button figured for display on the MFD
while in the ARC mode will only.
change the display to the stan-
dard HSI compass rose.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/162.1.5


Section 2.1mp 9/8/10 7:46 PM Page 2.1.6

EHSI Operation

BEARING POINTER ciation. An optional push button


SELECT sequence allows independent
selection and display of the
respective DME distance without
the presence of the bearing
pointer.

The bearing pointer select but- E x a m p l e : For a single ADF


tons work in a similar manner as installation, the ADF bearing
the NAV sensor select button. A pointer may be displayed on
press of the bearing pointer but- either the single or double bar
ton sequentially selects the next pointer. The annunciation
available sensor for display. The associated with either bearing
bearing pointer sensor list con- pointer will be ADF, not ADF 1
tains only those sensors which or ADF 2.
have bearing information capabil-
ities. If the selected sensor has The following is an all-inclusive
distance information paired with list, in order, of the bearing point-
it, that distance will also be dis- er sensors that may be interfaced
played below the sensor annun- with the EFS 40/50:

DECLUTTER, (NO #1 OR #2 BEARING POINTER INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED)

VOR, (VOR OR TCN)

TCN, (ONLY AVAILABLE WHEN THE TACAN HAS AN INDEPENDENT CONTROL HEAD)

OR LNAV, (FMS, LOR, OMG or *GPS)

NAV (KNS 81 ONLY)

MLS

ADF

DME ONE DISTANCE ONLY, (OPTIONAL) *SW 08 OR LATER

Only those sensors interfaced to N o t e : Software release 0 5


the EFS 40/50 will be included in allows single bearing sensors
the sequence. to be displayed on either bear -
ing pointer.
Software release 07 and high -
er, the DME only field can be
configured to annunciate
‘DME’ or ‘NAV’.

2.1.6 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 2.1mp 9/8/10 7:46 PM Page 2.1.7

EHSI Operation

ARC SECTORED the time of installation and certifi-


MODE SELECTION cation, that allows a weather only
mode to be selected on the MFD.
A A press of the ARC button will
ARC R sequentially select the possible
C display formats.

The ARC mode provides the pilot A press of the ARC button while
a large scale view of the CDI by in the 360-degree mode will
presenting an approximate 85- result in an ARC presentation of
degree sector display of the com- the same format. For example, if
pass. the 360 NAV MAP WITH
WEATHER mode is being dis-
The EFS 40/50 EHSI has five played and the ARC button is
possible ARC sectored display pressed, the resulting display for-
formats: standard HSI compass mat will be ARC NAV MAP WITH
rose, NAV CDI map, NAV CDI WEATHER.
map with weather and standard
HSI compass rose with weather. The ARC display selection list
Software release 05 provides a may include the following:
configuration option, selectable at

ARC COMPASS ROSE

ARC NAV MAP

A ARC NAV MAP WITH WEATHER (OPTIONAL)


R
C
ARC COMPASS ROSE WITH WEATHER (OPTIONAL)

ARC WEATHER ONLY (OPTIONAL ON MFD)

WEATHER is an option selected Software release 05 provides


at the time of installation and is MFD, multi function display,
included in the system certifica- capabilities. If an MFD is
tion. If a compatible weather installed, an additional ARC for-
radar is not installed, the weather mat option is offered, selectable
option will not be in the at the time of installation and cer-
sequence. tification, which provides an

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/162.1.7


Section 2.1mp 9/8/10 7:46 PM Page 2.1.8

EHSI Operation

uncluttered weather radar pre- w TST—


sentation. The MFD ARC weath-
er only format provides a typical To display the EHSI system
weather radar presentation, no SELF TEST, press and hold the
navigation data is presented TST/REF button for three sec-
when this mode is selected. onds. Upon entering Self Test, a
test pattern will be displayed. In
Refer to radar controls in this the center of the test pattern,
section for details on weather either a SELF TEST PASS or
radar operation. SELF TEST FAIL will be annun-
ciated. With 04/05/06 software,
RANGE SELECTION the SELF TEST display will
remain until the TST/REF button
RNG is pressed again. Beginning with
RNG
07 software, the EFS will cancel
the test mode and return both the
A press of the RANGE DOWN EADI and EHSI to normal opera-
button selects the next lower tion after 5 seconds.
range to be displayed while in the
NAV MAP or WEATHER modes N o t e : If the SELF TEST FAIL
of operation. Once the lowest message is annunciated, the
selectable range is reached, the system should be serviced.
RANGE UP button must be used
for a range change. w REF GROUND SPEED
or TIME-TO-STATION
The operation of the RANGE UP selection
button is similar to the RANGE
DOWN except it selects the next With software 04/05/06/07, the
higher range to be displayed TST/REF button allows alternate
while in the NAV MAP or selection of Ground speed or
WEATHER modes of operation. Time-to-station as calculated by
the selected primary NAV sys-
TST/REF tem. When Ground speed or
TST Time-to-station information is
SYS REF available it will be displayed
REF below the distance information in
the upper right corner of the dis-
The TST/REF button will per- play. If the information is not pro-
forms SELF TEST display, vided, the associated annuncia-
Ground speed, Time-to-Station tor will be removed. The
or LNAV formatting selections alternate selection of Ground
with software 04/05/06/07. speed and Time-To-Station will
The TST/REF button will per- not be allowed in the MAP mode
forms SELF TEST or LNAV for- with an LNAV selected as the pri-
matting selections with software mary navigation source. Begin-
release 08 and higher. ning with software 08, both

2.1.8 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 2.1mp 9/8/10 7:46 PM Page 2.1.9

EHSI Operation

ground speed and time-to-station w REF MAP FORMAT


are displayed simultaneously.
Time-To-Station is displayed When the selected EFS 40/50
immediately below the Ground display is LNAV MAP, the
Speed using the format of hours TST/REF button allows selection
and minutes separated by a of the desired NAV MAP format.
colon (H:MM). To determine the present MAP
format momentarily press the
Note: The Time-To-Station field TST/REF button. The momen-
used with software 08 can also tary button press will activate the
be used for an abnormal DME present MAP format annuncia-
annunciation which has priori - tion. If the displayed format is
ty. desired, no additional action is
required; the format message will
The EFS 40/50 will calculate be removed within 5 seconds. If
ground speed and time-to-station a different format is desired,
in installations which use an sequence through the list by
ARINC 568 type DME. If a con- momentarily pressing the
ventional DME indicator is also TST/REF button until the desired
used, differences in ground format is displayed. Approxi-
speed and time-to-station display mately 5 seconds after the last
may be noticed. button press, the map format
annunciation will be removed.
Note: Time-To-Station is
replaced with Time-To-Way - The following is an all-inclusive
point when the selected prima - list, in order, of the possible NAV
ry nav is an LNAV providing MAP formats:
this information.

FPL ID (FLIGHT PLAN WITH


FULL ICAO IDENTIFIERS)
TEST
AIRPORT (TO WAYPOINT AND NEAREST
AIRPORTS WITH ICAO IDENTIFIERS)
REF
NAVAIDS (TO WAYPOINT AND NEAREST NAVAIDS
WITH ICAO IDENTIFIERS)

Note: Depending upon the Flight Management System installed,


the above format options may not be fully supported. Systems
such as the BENDIX/KING KNS 660, KLN 88, and KLN 90, that
support the GAMA 429 LNAV data bus will provide the above for -
mat options.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/162.1.9


Section 2.1mp 9/8/10 7:46 PM Page 2.1.10

EHSI Operation

COURSE SELECT KNOB During these LNAV modes of


operation the EFS 4 0 / 5 0
COURSE SELECT knob will be
inactive.

HEADING SELECT KNOB

Rotation of the COURSE


SELECT knob allows the course
pointer and digital course to be
set at the desired course.

The ED 461, CP 467 and CP Rotation of the HEADING


468 provide a ”DIRECT TO” fea- SELECT knob allows the head-
ture. Pushing the center of the ing bug on the EHSI to be rotated
ED 461 Course Select knob or to the desired heading.
pulling the CP 467 or CP 468
COURSE SELECT knob will The ED 461, CP 467 and CP
cause the course pointer and dig- 468 provide a “HEADING
ital course readout on the EHSI SYNC” feature. Pushing the cen-
to slew to the direct course to the ter of the ED 461 heading select
selected NAVAID or active way- knob or pulling the CP 467 or
point. C P 468 HEADING SELECT
knob will cause the heading bug
If the selected NAV sensor is an on the EHSI to slew to the pre-
LNAV system, it may have sent aircraft heading (lubber line).
modes of operation that control
the selected course.

DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS CONTROL

lower limit of the display bright -


ness may appear as an inoper -
ative tube during normal day -
BRT light operation. It is therefore
advisable to check the BRT
The BRT knob controls the dis- knob setting during preflight
play brightness. test.

Note: The display brightness To ensure maximum display


control provides full range dim - tube life, it is highly recom -
ming to allow night operation in mended that the display be
no- or low-light situations. The operated at the lowest accept -
able brightness level.

2.1.10SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 2.2mp 9/8/10 7:47 PM Page 2.2.1

EADI Operation

EADI OPERATION

EADI DETAILED OPERATING CONTROLS


This section, EADI Operation, of For clarification on a particular
the EHI 40/50 Pilot’s Guide display or operational feature
describes the EADI operational refer to section IV, EADI DIS-
controls of the CP 467 and CP PLAYS or section V, OPERAT-
470 used with an ED 462 or ED ING INSTRUCTIONS.
551/A EADI.
The CP 467 shown in Figure
EADI controls are limited to three 2.2.1 is used in EFIS installations
basic functions: EADI display utilizing an ED 462 or ED 551/A
brightness adjustment, DH (deci- as the EHSI. The CP 4 7 0
sion height) set and Radio Alti- shown in Figure 2.2.2 is used in
tude test. EFIS installations utilizing the ED
461 EHSI control display unit
with an ED 462 EADI.

Figure 2.2.1
CP 467 EFIS CONTROL PANEL

ADI DH
RALT

TST
BRT SET

Figure 2.2.2
CP 470 EADI CONTROL PANEL

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 2.2.1


Section 2.2mp 9/8/10 7:47 PM Page 2.2.2

EADI Operation

BRIGHTNESS increments up to 500 feet and


ADI
thenDH
in 10 foot increments to
RALT 2,500 feet.

TST Once the desired DH is selected,


BRT BRT
push in the DH set knob to lock
The BRT knob controls the dis- the selected DH altitude. If DH is
play brightness. set to OFF, the “DH” annuncia-
tion will not be displayed.
N o t e : The display brightness
control provides full range dim - RALT TST
ming to allow night operation in
no- or low-light situations. The RALT
lower limit of the display bright - RALT TST
ness may appear as an inoper - TST
ative tube during normal day -
light operation. It is therefore Pressing the RALT TST (Radio
advisable to check the BRT Altimeter Test) push button pro-
knob setting during preflight vides a discrete output to the
test. Radio Altimeter initiating its self
test function.
To ensure maximum display
tube life, it is highly recom - The height displayed on the
mended that the display be EADI will depend on the type of
operated at the lowest accept - Radio Altimeter installed. For
able brightness level. details on this information refer to
the Radio Altimeter Pilot’s Guide
DH SET of approve Flight Manual Sup-
plement.
ADI DH
RALT

TST
DH
BRT
To set the Decision Height, pull
out and turn the DH knob. Turn-
ing clockwise will increase the
Decision Height selected, turning
counter clockwise will decrease
the Decision Height. The DH set
knob is variable rate, the faster
the knob is turned the greater the
change in a given amount of
rotation. The Decision Height
range is from “OFF” to 2,500 feet
and will be displayed in one foot

2.2.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 2.3mp 9/8/10 7:48 PM Page 2.3.1

Radar Operation

RADAR OPERATION
RADAR CONTROLS, (CP 466A & CP 466B)
The following section provides 84VP, RDR 2000. Figure 2.3.2
general operating information on shows the CP 466B used with
EFS 40/50 radar control panels, an RDS 86, RDS 86VP or RDR
CP 466A & CP 466B. Figure 2100. For detailed information
2.3.1 shows the CP 466A used on the specific weather radar
with an RDS 81, RDS 82 or functions, refer to the appropriate
R D S 82VP, RDS 84 or RDS radar pilot’s guide.

ON
ON
GND
TST
TST Wx
Wx WxA BRT
MAP
STBY
OFF
OFF VP TRK TRK
OFF

GAIN
GAIN
UP
UP
TILT
TILT O
DN
DN
PULL ARL PULL PULL
STAB AUTO
OFF

Figure 2.3.1
CP 466A

ON
ON
GND
TST
TST Wx
Wx WxA
WxA BRT
MAP
STBY
STBY
OFF
OFF VP TRK TRK
OFF

GAIN
GAIN
UP
UP
TILT
TILT O
DN
PULL ARL
PULL ARL PULL AUTO
PULL AUTO

Figure 2.3.2
CP 466B

Note: The CP 466A and B shown include the push buttons required
for the Vertical Profile radars. For non-VP installations using the
CP 466A or B the VP and two track buttons will not be present.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 2.3.1


Section 2.3mp 9/8/10 7:48 PM Page 2.3.2

Radar Operation

OFF-STBY-TST-ON ation. Depending on the select-


ed mode of operation, WX,WXA
ON or MAP GND
is displayed below
TST Wx WxA BRTthe
MAP annunciator on the
NAV source
STBY
radar mode line.
OFF VP TRK TRK
OFF
Note: If “ON” is selected on the
The rotary OFF-STBY-TST-ON
GAIN
C P 466 radar control panel,
knob selects the desired operat- the radar Antenna,UPReceiver
ing condition for the radar. and Transmitter (ART)
TILT is oper -
ational. However, ifDNa weather
w OFF PULL ARL radar mode
PULLis not selected for
AUTO
display on one of the indicators
Disables the ART (Antenna, the ART is placed in standby
Receiver and Transmitter) power by the EFIS.
supply. “OFF” is displayed below
the NAV source annunciator on
the radar mode line. WXTST ON Wx WxA GND BRT
MAP
w STBY STBY
Selects the weather mode (WX)
OFF VP TRK TRK
After 30 seconds in this mode, when pressed. “WX” will be dis- OFF
the system is in a state of readi- played below the NAV source
ness. No radar transmission annunciator GAINon the radar mode
occurs, and the antenna is line, if a weather mode is select- UP
parked in the down position. ed. TILT
“STBY” is displayed below the DN
NAV source annunciator on the ON PULL ARL GND PULL AUTO
TST WXA Wx WxA
MAP
BRT
radar mode line, if a weather
mode is selected. STBY

OFF Selects the VPweather-alert


TRK
mode
TRK
w TST when pressed. The magenta OFF
area of a storm will flash between
Causes the test pattern to be dis- GAIN
magenta and black. “WXA” will
played on the indicator, if a be displayed below the NAV UP
weather mode is selected. source annunciator on the radar TILT
“TEST” is displayed below the mode line, if a weather mode is DN
NAV source annunciator on the selecPULL ted. ARL PULL AUTO
radar mode line.
ON GND MAP GND
Wx WxA BRT
w ON TST MAP
STBY
Selects the condition of normal Places the radar in ground map-
operation, allowingOFF
for weather VP
ping mode TRK TRK
of operation; disables OFF
detection or other modes of oper- weather-alert feature and acti-
GAIN
UP
2.3.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10TILT
DN
PULL ARL PULL AUTO
Section 2.3mp 9/8/10 7:48 PM Page 2.3.3

Radar Operation

vates gain control. “MAP” will be 30 degrees depending on the


displayed below the NAV source Radar) is referred to as taking a
annunciator on the radar mode vertical “slice”.
line. (Magenta is not active in the
GND MAP mode.) Once Vertical Profile is selected,
the desired profile-azimuth angle
LIGHTNING may be changed in two degree
increments by pressing and hold-
ing the appropriate TRK button.
o (Optional) Enables the Light- One of two things will happen
ning displayON when pressed if a when aGND TRK button is pressed:
BRT
Wx
weather TST
mode is selected for dis-WxA
(1) If MAP
the radar’s antenna is
play. STBY already profiling, the antenna will
move in the two-degree incre-
VP OFF VP ments,TRK
TRK “slicing” in the direction
OFF
determined by the TRK button; or
GAIN (2) A “WAIT” annunciation will be
o (Optional) Once the desired displayed indicating UPthat the
azimuth is selected with the TRK radar’s antenna willTILT perform the
button, press the VP button to desired “slicing” function as soon
enter the Vertical Profile mode of as the antenna
PULL ARL returnsDN
PULL AUTO to the last
operation. The Vertical Profile selected profiling-azimuth angle.
Screen will appear. The weather
mode of operation (WX, WXA or Depending on the software ver-
GND MAP) displayed in the sion of the RDS VP radar and
lower left corner of the display the system installation, the anten-
will be the same as existed just na may also scan horizontally
prior to selecting VP. To select a while in the VP mode. If the
different weather mode once in antenna is not sweeping vertical-
Vertical Profile, simply select the ly when the TRK button is
desired mode (WX, WXA or GND pressed, a “WAIT” annunciation
MAP) by pressing the appropri- will be displayed until the anten-
ate button. na returns to the last vertical
“slice” azimuth.
Note: A brief period of time will
normally elapse before the dis - To terminate the Vertical Profile
play will “paint” the Vertical mode and return to the normal
Profile “picture”. This time mode (horizontal scan), press the
delay is due to the fact that the VP button. The radar system will
radar continues its normal retain its existing weather mode
azimuth scan after the VP but - and return to horizontal scanning.
ton is pressed. A track line will be present on the
screen for 15 seconds to indicate
The operation of scanning the the location of the last profiling-
antenna vertically (+/- 20 or +/- azimuth angle.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 2.3.3


Section 2.3mp 9/8/10 7:48 PM Page 2.3.4

Radar Operation

Beginning with EFS software ver- of the aircraft. In any other map
sion 09, a Split Screen mode is weather presentation, only the
added to the VP button selection yellow dashed line will be dis-
sequence immediately following played.
the Vertical Profile mode. During
this Split Screen mode the EFS For VP operations, the TRK but-
will toggle the antenna between ton performs two functions. 1.)
vertical and horizontal scans Prior to engaging VP, the appro-
every 6 seconds, allowing both to priate button (left or right) is used
be displayed simultaneously on to place the track line at the
the MFD. See Figure 4.4.4. desired azimuth angle to be verti-
cally scanned (sliced). When VP
Note: This Split Screen mode is is engaged, the slice will be taken
an operational enhancement at the last position of the track
added to EFS 09 software that line, whether it is visible or not. If
does not require any modifica - the track line has not been
tion to the existing RDS selected after power has been
82VP/84VP/86VP/RDR 2000 applied to system and VP is
weather radar systems. Since engaged, the slice will be taken
this feature was not part of the at 0 degrees (directly in front of
original design of these radars, the aircraft). 2.) When in VP
the transition between horizon - mode, pressing the TRK will
tal and vertical scans is not change the selected azimuth
synchronized to the antenna two-degrees left or right, depend-
scan and will therefore occur ing on which button is pressed.
at random scan positions. Continuously holding the TRK
button will result in the system
Horizontal (azimuth) and vertical “slicing” in two-degree incre-
(tilt) track lines are displayed on ments, called continuous profile.
the MFD full time during the split Continuous profile is not used on
screen mode to indicate the the RDR 2000.
ON antenna scan positionGND in each BRT
TST planWx e. WxA
MAP Beginning with EFS software ver-
STBY sion 09, the Drift Angle Track fea-
ture can be activated on the MFD
OFF TRK VP TRK TRK by pressing both TRK buttons
OFF
simultaneously. While active, this
GAIN feature places the track line at
o (Optional) If the weather only the UPdrift angle provided by an
mode is selected on the MFD, TILT LNAV. The track line always indi-
pressing the TRK button acti- cates the azimuth angle at which
vates
PULL ARLand slews a yellow dashed a DN
PULL AUTO vertical scan is performed for
azimuth line. It also activates a VP operation.
digital display showing the num-
ber of degrees the azimuth line is Note:Approximately 15 seconds
located left or right from the nose after drift angle track is select -

2.3.4 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 2.3mp 9/8/10 7:48 PM Page 2.3.5

ON GND
TST Wx WxA BRT
MAP Radar Operation
STBY
ed, the track line will disap - tems where weather detection is
OFF VP TRK TRK
pear, however, the weather no longer possible because
OFF of
radar will continue to use the attenuation.
drift GAIN
angle even though the
track line is not displayed. TILT UP
TILT
The EFS must be receiving valid DN
PULL ARL from an
drift angle information
LNAV and have the drift angle Permits manual adjustment of
bug displayed before the Drfit antenna tilt 15 degrees up or
Angle Track feature can be acti- down to enable the pilot to ana-
vated. lyze the weather presentation.
The tilt angle is displayed below
o A configuration option was the NAV source annunciator on
added with software 09 to allow the radar tilt annunciator line.
the drift angle bug to be dis-
played full time, in addition to the If a CP 466A is installed, pull the
original option which displayed Tilt selector knob, PULL STAB
this bug only when the LNAV OFF, for “STAB OFF” opera-
providing drift angle was selected tions. “STAB OFF” will appear
as the primary nav sensor on on the Radar Fault/Warning line
EFS. ON displayed below
GNDthe NAV source BRT
TST Wx WxA
annunciator just
MAP under the Anten-
Drift angleSTBY
track is de-activated na Tilt annunciation line.
and manual control returned by
pressing either
OFF TRK left or TRK
VP TRK 466BTRK
If a CP is installed, pull the
right buttons individually. OFF
Tilt selector knob, PULL AUTO,
GAIN for Auto Tilt. If selected, an “A”
GAIN will follow the tilt direction indica-
UP
ON tion arrow preceding the internal-
GND TILT BRT
TST Wx lyWxA
calculated Auto tilt angle sup-
MAP
STBY
plied by the ART.PULL AUTO DN
Manual gain control becomes
active whenOFFGND MAP is select-
VP TRK TRK
ed. In all other modes, gain is OFF
internally set.
GAIN
UP
PULL ARL
TILT
DN
PULL ARL PULL AUTO
Only present when an RDS 86
or RDS 86VP is installed. Auto-
matic Range Limit displays a
blue area behind weather sys-

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 2.3.5


Section 2.3mp 9/8/10 7:48 PM Page 2.3.6

Radar Operation

*This page intentionally left blank.

2.3.6 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 2.4mp 9/8/10 7:49 PM Page 2.4.1

MFD Operation

MFD OPERATION

MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL


The EFS 40/50 Multi Function The CP 469, MFD control panel,
Display Control Panel provides provides control of the selection
for display of a more meaningful of Nav source selection, display
variety of data than was previ- format and course selection.
ously accessible on EFIS MFD Starting with software release 08,
displays. In fact, the EFS 40/50 the CP 469A MFD control panel
MFD may be used as a second replaces the CP 469 and pro-
EHSI by the pilot or copilot, pro- vides additional control of Check-
viding them the ability to cross list, Joystick and TCAS functions.
check their primary EHSI, pre- Weather radar control functions
view or set up for a potential nav- and mode selection are per-
igation scenario, and still function formed by the CP 466A/B, an
as a primary weather radar or independent weather radar con-
LNAV map display. trol panel.

CP469

CP 469A
WITH CHECKLIST & JOYSTICK

Note: Software levels 04, 05, 06 and 07 do not support Checklist or


TCAS functions.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 2.4.1


Section 2.4mp 9/8/10 7:49 PM Page 2.4.2

MFD Operation

CONTROL PANEL BUTTON OPERATIONS


Those push buttons which have pilot that the MFD CRS knob is
common operation between the not active and is referenced to
MFD and EHSI control panels, the pilot’s EHSI selected course.
ED 461, CP 467 and CP 468,
will function as defined in the Example: CRS 135
section 2.1, EHSI Operation
unless otherwise noted in this HSI BUTTONTCS HSI ARC ENT NAV
section. For detailed operational
information on those buttons Will function identical to, but inde-
please refer section 2.1. pendent of, the CRSone on the ED 1-2
461, CP 467 or CP 468. Begin-
COURSE SELECT ning with software 07, an addi-
KNOB/BUTTON tional "Plan View" displayCRS formatSEL TST REF
can be configured for presenta-
tion on the MFD. When config-
ured, this display format is added
to the end of the HSI button
The course select knob will func- selection list provided in section
tion identical to, but independent 2.1.
of the one on the EHSI control
panel, ED 461, CP 467 or CP Refer to section 2.1 EHSI OPER-
468, when the CRS SEL button ATION for detailed information.
is activated. This provides inde-
pendent selection of course on ARC TCS
BUTTONHSI ARC ENT NAV C-L
the MFD referenced to the same
or a different nav sensor. Will function similar to, but inde-
pendentCRS of, the one on the ED
If the CRS SEL button is not acti- 461, CP 467 or CP 468. The 1-2
vated, the course select knob on MFD ARC button will allow the
the CP 469 will not be active. In selection of anCRS optional BRT
SEL radar TST REF
this mode the MFD will obtain only MFD display. This display
selected course data from the will not contain navigation or map
pilot EHSI control panel. In this data and is added to the end of
mode the course on the EHSI the ARC button selection list pro-
and MFD will be synchronized, vided in section 2.1.
unless the selected sensor on
the MFD is a LNAV providing NAV BUTTON
DTK.
The NAV button may be config-
When the MFD course select ured at the time of installation
knob is not active, a bar the color and certification to operate in one
of the CRS annunciator will be of two methods.
placed above it. This will alert the

2.4.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 2.4mp 9/8/10 7:49 PM Page 2.4.3

MFD Operation

o Configuration option number If NAV push button configuration


one will slave the MFD to the #1 option number two is selected,
EHSI. The NAV push button will the 1-2 button functions identical
cause the MFD to display either to, but independent of, the one on
the same NAV sensor as dis- the ED 461, CP 467 or CP 468.
played on the EHSI or the LNAV.
When this configuration is select- BEARING #1 & #2 BUTTON
ed the 1-2 push button allows
selection between the on side
and off side sensors. Once a
side is selected, that side will
remain the selected side until the Will function identical to, but inde-
1-2 button is pressed again. This pendent of, the one on the ED
allows the pilot the ability to 461, CP 467 or CP 468.
select the off side sensor to pro-
vide himself a constant visual Refer to section 2.1 EHSI OPER-
cross comparison. ATION for detail information.

o Configuration option number RANGE UP/DOWN BUTTON


two enables the NAV button to
function identical to, but indepen-
dent of, the one on the ED 461,
CP 467 or CP 468. When this
configuration option is selected Will function identical to, but inde-
the pilot can select any available pendent of, the one on the ED
nav sensor for display on the 461, CP 467 or CP 468.
MFD independent of what is dis-
played on the EHSI. Refer to section 2.1 EHSI OPER-
ATION for detail information.
1-2 BUTTON
JOYSTICK
If NAV push button configuration
option number one is selected, w WAYPOINT
where the MFD is slaved to the ENTRY
EHSI, the 1-2 push button allows OPERATION
the pilot to select between on
side and off side NAV sensors. When the joystick is interfaced to
Unlike the 1-2 push button on the an EFS 40/50 system, it can be
EHSI control panel, it selects used to generate and move sin-
which side will be displayed until gle waypoint on the display unit.
pushed again. A press of the These waypoints can then be
NAV push button will not cause a entered into the KNS 81, KNS
selected off side sensor to cycle 660, KLN 88, KLN 90, or any
back to an on side sensor as it other LNAV using an appropriate
does on the EHSI. GAMA 429 interface. The KNS

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 2.4.3


Section 2.4mp 9/8/10 7:49 PM Page 2.4.4

MFD Operation

81 must have the graphic output the cursor and its coordinates are
bus. displayed. The coordinates of the
cursor will remain displayed for at
With an LNAV, RNAV, (or KNS least 10 seconds and disappear
81 configured as a NAV) select- from the display within 15 sec-
ed for the primary nav sensor onds after activating the ENTER
and during display of a NAV MAP button. If the waypoint cursor is
on the MFD, initial movement of not moved for 20 seconds, it will
the joystick will create a waypoint disappear from view. The next
cursor ahead of the aircraft on time the joystick is moved, the
the half range ring at the current cursor will re-appear in the same
heading. This will be true for both location on the display screen.
HSI and ARC display formats. However, a change of primary
The cursor will be a standard NAV sensor or display modes will
white waypoint symbol. Move- reset the invisible cursor location
ment of the waypoint will be in to its initial starting position.
any of the eight directions com-
manded by the joystick. The rate Note: Systems with an MFD can
of movement will start off slow have the joystick on the CP
and increase in speed in two 469A MFD control panel or a
steps. Return of the joystick to stand alone joystick. Additional
its center, off position at any time joysticks for the pilot or copilot
will reset the rate of movement to normally will not be installed.
the slowest speed. The cursor Systems without an MFD may
location on the display screen have up to two joysticks that
and its rate of movement relative are completely independent of
to the display screen will be inde- each other; one for the pilot
pendent of the display range and one for the copilot. The
selected. The cursor is not pilot’s joystick can create or
allowed to exit the compass. move a waypoint only on the
When an LNAV is selected as pilot’s EHSI, and any waypoint
the primary navigation source, created by the pilot can only
Lat/Lon coordinates of the cursor be loaded into the #1 RNAV or
will be displayed in the lower cen- #1 LNAV. Likewise, the copi -
ter of the display. When a KNS lot’s joystick can create or
81 is the active primary naviga- move a waypoint only on the
tion source, and it is not in the copilot’s EHSI, and any way -
ILS mode, radial and distance of point created by the copilot
the cursor from the navaid in use can only be loaded into the #2
by the KNS 81 will be displayed RNAV or #2 LNAV.
instead of Lat/Lon coordinates.
The cursor position information w PLAN VIEW OPERATION
can be transferred to the LNAV (available with 07 and higher)
or KNS 81 that is selected as the
primary navigation sensor, by Plan View will be available in the
pressing the ENTER button while HSI key selection sequence

2.4.4 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 2.4mp 9/8/10 7:49 PM Page 2.4.5

MFD Operation

immediately following “DG able. Continuous upward pushes


MODE”. In addition to selecting will wrap the cursor within a
the plan view display mode, the checklist level.
operator must be using a nav A right push on the joystick will
source which will provide flight move the cursor to the top of the
plan information like FMS, GPS, next checklist page. Continuous
and LORAN sensors. right pushes will wrap the cursor
to the top of the next page within
If joystick is not available, the the list.
center of the screen will repre-
sent the aircraft present position A left push on the joystick will
when plan view mode is entered, move the cursor to the top of the
and the map may not be moved previous checklist page. Contin-
from this reference. Range could uous left pushes will wrap the
be changed using the range but- cursor to the top of the previous
tons. When a joystick is avail- page within the list.
able, it will control the flight plan
view relative to the aircraft pre- ENT BUTTON
sent position. Pressing the “ENT’ ENT
button wiil reset the display
where the aircraft is displayed in w WAYPOINT
the center of the display. ENTRY OPERATION

w CHECKLIST OPERATION In the map mode the cursor posi-


(available with 08 and higher) tion information can be trans-
ferred to the LNAV or KNS 81
In the Checklist mode, the Joy- that is selected as the primary
stick commands will be limited to navigation sensor, by pressing
four positions: UP, DOWN, LEFT the ENTER button while the cur-
and RIGHT. The 45° commands sor and its coordinates are dis-
will be ignored. played. The coordinates of the
cursor will remain displayed for at
A down push on the joystick will least 10 seconds and will disap-
advance the cursor checklist line. pear from the display within 15
A down push at the bottom of a seconds after the ENTER button
checklist page will advance the is pressed.
cursor to the next page if avail-
able. Continuous downward w PLAN VIEW OPERATION
pushes will wrap the cursor within (available with 07 and higher)
a checklist level.
In the Plan View mode the enter
An up push on the joystick will button will be used to reset the
move the cursor up one checklist aircraft in the center of the dis-
line. An up push at the top of a play.
checklist page will move the cur-
sor to the previous page if avail-

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 2.4.5


Section 2.4mp 9/8/10 7:49 PM Page 2.4.6

MFD Operation

w CHECKLIST OPERATION CHECKLIST


CHK
(available with 08 and higher) SELECT LIST
In the Checklist mode the enter (available with 08 and higher)
button will generally function to
check items in the list. The This button is not functional in
checklist was designed such that Software 04, 05, 06 or 07.
the pilot can complete the entire
checklist by using only the enter Pressing the checklist button will
button. display the root page of the
checklist. If an emergency dis-
Normally, pressing the ‘ENT’ but- crete is active, pressing the
ton will cause an unchecked checklist button will display the
checklist line to be checked and emergency page
the cursor to advance to the next
unchecked line. At the end of a
page pressing the ‘ENT’ button TCAS ONLY TCAS
will cause the cursor to advance SELECT ONLY
to the next page (if available) and
to check the first unchecked line (available with 08 and higher)
on that page. If no unchecked
items exist between the cursor This button is not functional in
position and the end of the list, Software 04, 05, 06 or 07.
TCS HSI ARC the cursorNAV
ENT is placed on theC-Lfirst
unchecked page which refer- The TCAS ONLY button will tog-
enced the specific list. gle the MFD display between the
CRS 1-2 TCAS only presentation and the
TEST/REFERENCE previously selected mode.
BRT
CRS SEL TST REF TERRAIN SELECT

(available with 14 and higher)


Will function identical to, but inde-
pendent of, the one on the ED This button is not functional in
461, CP 467 or CP 468.
Software 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09,
10, 11, 12 or 13.
With checklist active, this button
will cause a checklist "help" page
The TERRAIN SELECT button
to be displayed on the MFD. will toggle the MFD display
between the Terrain presentation
Refer to section 2.1 EHSI OPER-
and the previously selected
ATION for detailed information.
weather mode.

2.4.6 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 3mp 9/9/10 1:43 AM Page 3.1

Abbreviated Operations

Figure 3.1
ED 461 EHSI CONTROL PANEL OPERATION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 3.1


Section 3mp 9/9/10 1:43 AM Page 3.2

Abbreviated Operations

Figure 3.2
CP 468 EFIS CONTROL PANEL OPERATION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 3.2


Section 3mp 9/9/10 1:43 AM Page 3.3

Abbreviated Operations

Figure 3.3
CP 467 EFIS CONTROL PANEL OPERATION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 3.3


Section 3mp 9/9/10 1:43 AM Page 3.4

Abbreviated Operations

Figure 3.4
CP 469 MFD CONTROL PANEL OPERATION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 3.4


Section 3mp 9/9/10 1:43 AM Page 3.5

Abbreviated Operations

Figure 3.5
CP 469A MFD CONTROL PANEL OPERATION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 3.5


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.1

EHSI Displays

EHSI DISPLAYS

EFS 40/50 COLOR STANDARDS


The EFS 40/50 uses a defined color set which aids the pilot in inter-
preting displayed information. A brief summary of the color set is as
follows:

Warnings Red
Cautions/Abnormal Source Yellow
Scales and associated figures White
On-side approach and navigation data Green
Cross-side NAV data Yellow
On-side non-approach navigation data (LNAV) Cyan
On-side commanded data Green
Cross-side commanded data Yellow
Selected heading, DME HOLD annunciation Orange
Selected source Matches NAV
data color
Selected active route/flight plan Green
Cross-side selected active route/flight plan Yellow
Held DME distance display White

For an example of the color usage, refer to figure 4.1.3 at the back of
this section, Typical EFS 40/50 EHSI Color Displays.

STANDARD EHSI DISPLAYS


Refer to Figures 4.1.5 and 4.1.6 45-degree index marks are adja-
while reviewing STANDARD cent to the compass scale.
EHSI DISPLAYS.
Free DG (directional gyro) opera-
NORMAL COMPASS CARD tion will be annunciated by a yel-
low FDG (or FHDG) to the left of
360° rotating white compass the lubber. The Free mode
scale indicates aircraft heading annunciation will only be support-
referenced to white triangular ed in installations with an ARINC
heading index (lubber line). The 429 AHRS (Attitude Heading
compass scale is divided in 5- Reference System) that supports
degree increments with the 10- the Free DG (directional gyro)
degree divisions being approxi- mode of operation via the digital
mately twice as long. Fixed data bus.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.1


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.2

EHSI Displays

N o t e : Software release 06 the pilot’s EHSI.


changed the DG annunciation
to HDG to better describe the In a dual EFS 40/50 installation
variety of heading sources that with software release 06 and
may be interfaced with the above, if both systems select the
E F S 40/50, ie. INS, AHRS same heading source, a yellow
and conventional gyros. “HDG1” or “HDG2” with a yellow
box around it will appear on both
Dual selectable compass inputs EHSIs alerting the pilots that they
are provided for. If a second have the same source selected.
compass system is installed, the
cross-side source is selected by
means of a remote mounted
switch. Once the alternate com-
pass source has been selected, Figure 4.1.1
a yellow DG1 (HDG1) or DG2 SAME HEADING SOURCE
(HDG2) will be displayed to the SELECTION
left of the lubber line.
When two compass sources are
In a dual EFS 40/50 installation available, the two inputs are
with software release 04 or 05, if compared for agreement. If the
both systems use the same two inputs do not fall within 6-
heading source, annunciations degrees of each other while in
will appear on both EHSI’s alert- level flight, a yellow comparison
ing the pilots they have the same warning, HDG under a double-
source selected. The EHSI that is ended arrow, will be annunciated
using its normal heading source to the right of the lubber line.
will annunciate a yellow “DG” See figure 4.1.5, EHSI SYMBOL
with a yellow box around it to DEFINITION.
indicate that its primary heading
source has been selected for use NAVIGATION SOURCE
on the other EHSI. The EHSI that ANNUNCIATION
is using its alternate heading
source will annunciate a yellow A vertical three- or four-letter
“DG1” or “DG2” as applicable alphanumeric readout located on
with a yellow box around it to the left or right side of the dis-
indicate the heading source play, depending on vertical scale
being used is the same one side selection, indicates the sys-
being used by the other EHSI. tem selected as the primary navi-
For example, if the co-pilot were gation sensor.
to select his alternate heading
source, heading #1, “DG1” would For dual sensor installations the
appear with a box around it on cross-side navigation system
the co-pilot’s EHSI and DG would may be selected by pressing the
appear with a box around it on 1-2 push button. Example: pilot

4.1.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.3

EHSI Displays

selecting co-pilot’s navigation Software release 06 incorporated


system or co-pilot selecting pilot’s the ability to interface with the
navigation system. The 1-2 push TACAN version of the KNS 81
button will not be active if the and annunciate TCN when the
system configuration does not KNS 81 is in the TACAN mode
support two of the same type of operation.
NAV sensors.
If both sides select the same
Green annunciations indicate an navigation source, (i.e., pilot and
on-side approach NAV system or co-pilot select VOR 2) a yellow
an enroute NAV system which box is placed around the naviga-
has been approved for approach tion source annunciator on both
use is being displayed. Yellow EHSI‘s.
indicates the cross-side system
has been selected. Cyan annun- If both sides select their respec-
ciations apply to on-side non- tive cross-side navigation source
approach LNAV systems. These (i.e., pilot selects system 2, co-
color codes apply to the NAV pilot selects system 1) then both
source annunciator, CRS pointer, NAV source annunciators will be
deviation bar, CRS line in MAP yellow with no yellow box.
mode, CRS, distance, ground-
speed, time-to-station, drift angle N o t e : Same source annuncia -
pointer and vertical deviation tion rules also apply to the
pointer. heading source.

Figure 4.1.2
SAME NAVIGATION SOURCE SELECTION ANNUNCIATION
SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT
Note: Starting with software 08
The orange symbolic aircraft pro- a configuration option is avail -
vides a visual reference of the able for the display of Fixed
aircraft present position in rela- wing or Rotary Wing symbolic
tionship to the deviation bar. aircraft.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.3


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.4

EHSI Displays

HEADING SELECT “BUG” COURSE SELECT

A notched heading bug is manu- The CRS control knob rotates the
ally rotated around the compass course pointer about the com-
scale by the heading select knob pass scale and sets digital
on the control panel. In the 360- course readout. Once set, the
degree compass mode a full time course pointer rotates with the
digital readout of the selected compass card. The selected
heading is displayed below the course indicates desired naviga-
vertical deviation scale position. tion course to be flown. Depend-
In the ARC mode, a digital head- ing on the LNAV (long range nav-
ing readout is displayed when the igation) installed, the course
heading bug is not completely in pointer may automatically be
view. The digital readout will be positioned to the DTK (desired
positioned just inside the com- track) when LNAV is selected as
pass scale on the side nearest the primary sensor. When LNAV
the heading bug. Once set, the is the selected sensor and DTK
heading bug rotates with the is displayed, the EFS 4 0 / 5 0
compass card. The heading bug course select knob is disabled.
is used to indicate desired head-
ing and provides selected head- In the upper left corner of the dis-
ing reference for autopilot steer- play, an alphanumeric readout
ing. annunciates the letters CRS and
indicates the selected navigation
A RED X will be drawn through course in degrees. When in a
the heading bug if there is a NAV map display mode, the
heading select knob failure on course pointer will not be dis-
the EFS 40/50 control panel. played, the alphanumeric readout
will be the only reference for the
Software release 06 added the selected course.
options, selectable at the time of
installation and certification, to N o t e : Desired track readout
select one of three heading bug (DTK) generated by an LNAV
and digital readout color choices: system replaces (CRS) in
LNAV mode. Some LNAV
o Orange systems may display CRS or
o Cyan DTK depending on the select -
o Magenta ed mode. MLS may display
AZ (azimuth) or BAZ (back
Prior to software 06, the heading azimuth) depending on the
bug and selected heading read- selected mode.
out are always orange. The
heading bug is not displayed in Systems with Software release
MFD only installations. This 05 retain (remember) the manu-
became an EFS system configu- ally selected course, as set by
ration option with software 09. the CRS knob, when the selected

4.1.4 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.5

EHSI Displays

primary NAV sensor is zontal position, providing stan-


sequenced through the LNAV dard course deviation information
position. In previous software (CDI) referenced to the digital
releases, once the LNAV sensor CRS selected. A RED X will be
was displayed, its CRS or DTK drawn through the CRS annunci-
would become the selected ation if there is a course select
course, requiring the CRS to be knob failure. In the event the
reset when another primary Nav selected course or desired track
sensor was selected. received from the LNAV
becomes invalid, a RED X will
This change will allow an ILS be drawn through the digital
inbound course to be selected readout.
prior to the completion of an
LNAV flight leg that will be fol- Note: The above heading failure
lowed by an ILS approach. mode does not apply when
ADF is the primary NAV sen -
In the event of a heading failure, sor. (ADF D-Bar is heading
the course pointer head and tail dependent and is non-opera -
are removed and the course tional without valid heading.)
deviation scale is fixed in a hori-
LATERAL COURSE DEVIATION SCALE
The course deviation scale, two navigation or localizer course in
white dots evenly spaced on both relation to the symbolic airplane.
sides of the symbolic aircraft,
provides a reference for the The following represents the
course deviation bar to indicate deviation scale for different navi-
the center line of the selected gation sources.

Note: Depending
on the type of
LNAV installed,
the Lateral Devia -
tion may be differ -
ent. GPS lateral
deviation scale is
for TSO C129
capable units
only. SW 15 and
later accepts
C145/C146 equip -
ment variable
deflection values.
LATERAL DEVIATION SCALE
(Aircraft Displacement)

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.5


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.6

EHSI Displays

LATERAL COURSE source is shown in the upper


DEVIATION BAR right corner. This readout will
also show aircraft groundspeed
The course deviation bar repre- and Time-to-Station/Waypoint.
sents the center line of the Both are displayed simultaneous-
selected navigation or localizer ly with software 08 and higher.
course.
The distance readout for naviga-
If invalid or failed primary NAV tion source 1 (the single-bar
sensor data is received the bearing pointer) is in the lower
course deviation bar and scale left corner below the navigation
are removed and a RED X source annunciator. The readout
annunciated. for navigation source 2 (the dou-
ble-bar bearing pointer) is in the
Beginning with software 09, the lower right corner below the navi-
deviation bar and scale are gation source annunciator.
decluttered without displaying a
RED X when the deviation infor- These readouts show distance
mation is provided in ARINC 429 (in nautical miles) to the selected
format with a status of NO COM- station when in VOR, TACAN,
PUTED DATA (NCD). The RED ILS or MLS mode. When in
X will still be displayed if the data LNAV, RNAV or GPS mode, dis-
is missing or invalid. tance to the waypoint is shown.
TO/FROM INDICATOR Each of these three distance
readouts is displayed in the same
A white filled triangle near the color as the source annunciator
center of the EHSI pointing and pointer with which it is asso-
toward the head (“TO”) or tail ciated.
(“FROM”) of the course pointer
indicates whether the selected With software 04/05/06/07 the
course is TO or FROM the sta- EFS 40/50 will display ground
tion or waypoint. The TO/FROM speed up to 999 KTS, Time-To-
annunciator is not displayed dur- Station up to 511 minutes and
ing ILS/MLS operation or when distance up to 4,095 nautical
an invalid NAV signal is received. miles. In most cases, the DME
will be the limiting factor in dis-
DISTANCE, GROUNDSPEED playable data.
and TIME-TO-STATION
With software 08 and higher, the
The EFS 40/50 provides up to EFS 40/50 will display ground
three distance displays — one speed up to 999 KTS, Time-To-
for each selected navigation Station up to 8:31 (H:MM univer-
source (if distance information is sal format) and distance up to
available from that source). 4,095 nautical miles. Time-To-
Station is displayed immediately
The readout for the primary NAV below and at the same time as

4.1.6 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.7

EHSI Displays

ground speed. In most cases, o Software 07 incorporated the


the DME will be the limiting factor capability to interface with a vari-
in displayable data. ety of multi channel DME,
VOR/ILS and MLS installations,
When DME HOLD is selected,
and perform automatic reversion
the distance displayed is white in
in the event of a failed DME sen-
color. “H” follows GS/TTS field
sor in certain installations.
(GS field after software 08) in the
upper right corner. During HOLD For those installations supporting
the displayed distance probably the automatic reversionary mode,
will not be associated with the the system can experience a
selected bearing pointer. For DME failure without the pilot or
more information on DME HOLD, copilot loosing the normal dis-
refer to the DME HOLD section tance presentation. For exam-
which follows. ple, if the number one DME,
whose primary job is servicing
o The bearing sensor selection
the number one VOR/ILS, failed,
function offers an optional DME-
the symbol generator would look
only display feature in the cycle.
to DME number two for VOR/ILS
If the DME-only option was
DME number one distance infor-
selected at the time of installation
mation. If the information was
and certification, DME #1 and #2
present, a yellow boxed DME 2
information may be independent-
would be displayed in the upper
ly selected for display in the bear-
right hand corner of the number
ing pointer information area with-
one EHSI and MFD. This alerts
out displaying a bearing pointer.
the pilot he is now getting dis-
To annunciate operational Dis- tance information from the copi-
tance Measuring Equipment lot’s DME. A green boxed DME
(including those associated with 2 is placed in the same location
an RNAV or LNAV) which has on the number 2 EHSI alerting
not acquired lock on to the the copilot the pilot is getting dis-
selected station, dashes of the tance information from his DME.
same color as the sensor annun- These boxed DME annunciations
ciator will be placed in the dis- use the same display field as the
tance data field. If the equipment Time-to-station (or Time-to-way-
has failed or information is not point) after software 08. The
being received by the EFS abnormal DME annunciation has
40/50, the dashes will be Red. In priority over TTS/TTW.
both cases the NM annunciation Note: The variety of the various
will remain and the KT/TTS will DME installations is numerous,
be removed if normally dis- and therefore may be neces -
played. sary to refer to the aircraft
DUAL MULTI CHANNEL flight manual supplement for
DME INSTALLATIONS specific operation of a given
installation.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.7


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.8

EHSI Displays

DME HOLD The bearing pointer sensor


annunciators located in the lower
When DME HOLD is selected, right and left corners of the dis-
the DME distance and annuncia- play also provide range informa-
tor color will change to white and tion when the selected bearing
remain that color until HOLD sensor has associated range. If
function is released. The sensor the associated range information
identifier (ADF, VOR ILS, etc) is provided by DME, then the
shall retain the original assigned range information and NM
color, this color difference indi- annunciation will change from the
cates there may be no relation- normal light blue or magenta
ship between the two fields. The color to white and be followed by
HOLD function is additionally an orange “H” when HOLD is
indicated by an orange letter “H” activated. If an ADF is the
which is displayed directly below selected bearing pointer sensor
and to the right of the distance and the DME assigned to that
information. DME groundspeed side is placed in HOLD, the large
and time-to-station will not be dis- ADF annunciation will reduce in
played when DME HOLD is size as the white held DME
active. If the DME provides range information and orange “H”
ARINC 429 frequency informa- is displayed below it.
tion, the HELD FREQUENCY will
be displayed in white where Please note that the range infor-
groundspeed was previously dis- mation being displayed is not ref-
played. erenced to the ADF, but to what-
ever channel the DME was tuned
DME HOLD for BEARING to when the pilot placed it in
POINTER/DME #1 and BEAR- HOLD.
ING POINTER/DME #2 will oper-
ate as described above, but DME HOLD will not function
HELD FREQUENCY information when an LNAV or RNAV is the
will not be displayed. selected sensor, and is not
allowed when MLS or TACAN is
Once the DME is placed in the selected primary sensor. The
HOLD, its distance will continue associated distance field is used
to be displayed and will not be to display waypoint distance or
affected when bearing pointers distance to the MLS or TACAN
and primary NAV sensors are station.
changed unless the selected
sensor provides range informa- Note: It is important to remem -
tion such as an LNAV, RNAV or ber that once a DME is placed
MLS. In these cases, the held in HOLD it probably is not ref -
information will be replaced with erenced to any VOR/ILS sen -
the selected sensor’s range infor- sor being displayed. Hold
mation. removes the dependency of

4.1.8 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.9

EHSI Displays

the DME to the VOR/ILS con - not receiving valid data, the Bear-
trol head. It is, therefore, up to ing pointer assigned to that bear-
the pilot to recognize that ing source will not be displayed
when the DME distance infor - and a RED X will be drawn
mation color changes to white through the selected bearing
and the orange “H” is dis - source annunciator at the bottom
played, the distance presented left or right of the display. The
is probably not paired to the associated distance data will
VOR/ILS control head frequen - remain displayed if valid.
cy.
If the compass card is MAG
Hold is a pilot selected mode of (magnetic) referenced, TRUE
operation for the DME. Once the bearing sensor pointers, such as
pilot selects hold, it is the pilot’s LNAV, may be displayed if valid
responsibility to remember where mag var (magnetic variation) is
the DME is HELD. provided to the EFS 40/50. In
this case, the TRUE sourced
DME and DME HOLD operation bearing pointer information will
may vary greatly from installation be converted to MAGNETIC ref-
to installation. This variation in erence.
operation is directly dependent
upon the number and types of If the compass card is TRUE ref-
DME installed. To best under- eren ced, MAGNETIC bearing
stand how these two functions sensor pointers, such as VOR
work in a particular installation, and ADF, may be displayed if
refer to the aircraft flight manual valid mag var (magnetic varia-
supplement or cont act the tion) is provided to the EFS
installing agency for a detailed 40/50. In this case, the MAG-
explanation. NETIC sourced bearing pointer
information will be converted to
BEARING POINTER TRUE reference.

The rotating light blue single bar In most cases mag var is provid-
#1 Bearing Pointer points in the ed by an LNAV. In a single
direction of the selected bearing LNAV installation the EFS 40/50
sensor ground station (or way- will use the single mag var
point when in the LNAV or RNAV source to compute display cor-
mode). rection for both number 1 and
number 2 sensors. In dual LNAV
The rotating magenta double bar installations with an LNAV select-
#2 Bearing Pointer performs the ed as the primary nav source,
identical function for #2 bearing that LNAV is the only source of
sensor systems. mag var. In dual LNAV installa-
tions with a primary nav source
If the selected bearing sensor is other than an LNAV, the mag var

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.9


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.10

EHSI Displays

will be supplied only by the on- 120 degrees on the compass


side LNAV with software prior to card. Bearing pointer number
08, but beginning with SW 08, two is referenced to an ADF
the off-side LNAV is used as a station and is pointing to 180
secondary source of mag var degrees on the compass card.
information.
When interpreting bearing
If valid mag var is not available, pointer number one in this
those bearing pointers displayed example, remember that VOR,
with mag var correction will be TCN, RNV, OMG, FMS, GPS
removed and a RED X is drawn or LOR indications are refer -
through the sensor annunciator enced to the compass card.
in the lower right or left corner. Therefore, since bearing point -
er number one is pointing to
In the event a heading failure 120 degrees on the compass
occurs, a heading flag will be dis- card, the correct course to the
played to the pilot, the compass VOR is 120 degrees. Like -
card will remain active to follow wise, since the tail of bearing
input form the compass system. pointer number one is on the
Bearing pointer information will 300-degree mark on the com -
continue to be displayed. The pass card, the correct bearing
EFS 40/50 will process the bear- from the VOR is 300 degrees.
ing information and present all
bearing poi nter information Caution: Do not assume that
except ADF referenced to the the course to the VOR is 30
compass card, the ADF bearing degrees to the right of the air -
pointer will be relative to the nose craft nose. Although the bear -
of the aircraft and lubber line on ing pointer is pointing 30
the EHSI. degrees to the right of the lub -
ber line, you must remember
EXAMPLE: that the pointer in this instance
is referenced to the compass
N o t e : Refer to figure 4.1. 4 card — not the lubber line or
BEARING POINTER OPERA - symbolic aircraft.
TION WITH LOSS OF HEAD -
ING when reviewing this When interpreting bearing
example. pointer number two in this
example, remember that ADF
Aircraft actual mag heading is indications are referenced to
030 degrees, but EHSI com - the lubber line and the symbol -
pass is failed and displays an ic aircraft. They are not refer -
incorrect heading of 090 enced to the compass card.
degrees — 60 degrees greater The compass card can be
than actual. Bearing pointer used only to help you deter -
number one is referenced to a mine ADF relative bearing.
VOR station and is pointing to

4.1.10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.11

EHSI Displays

Likewise, the tail of the pointer be displayed on the EHSI in


is at 360. Indicated heading installations that do not include
on the compass card is 090. EADI displays. (The SG must be
So relative bearing is 90 configured for EHSI only opera-
degrees left. Actual heading is tion). This radio altitude will be
30 degrees. So actual bearing displayed in white with a “ft” suffix
from the NDB is 90 degrees to near the bottom of the EHSI on
the left of 30 degrees, which is the side opposite the selected
300 degrees. NAV sensor annunciation. Deci-
One other thing to note about sion height (DH) select and DH
ADF indications with failed alert annunciations are not pro-
heading is this: The ADF vided on the EHSI.
bearing pointer points to the
station relative to the symbolic The displayed altitude range is
airplane. Since the bearing from -20 ft to 990 ft in 5 ft incre-
pointer in the example is point - ments below 100 ft and 10 ft
ing straight off the right wing of increments above 100 ft for EFS
the symbolic airplane, you may software 07 and 08. Beginning
conclude the station is straight with 09 software, 5 ft increments
off the right wing of the actual are provided up to 500 ft.
airplane.
The radio altitude is decluttered
MAGNETIC/TRUE at or above 1000 ft. Three red
HEADING ANNUNCIATIONS dashes will be displayed when
the radio altitude is invalid and
To the left of the lubber line a three white dashes are displayed
white “T” will be displayed when for values below -20 ft or data
the compass card is in the true with a No Computed Data (NCD)
mode of operation or left blank status.
when in magnetic mode.
Note: 20 ft is the minimum alti -
Magnetic compass heading is tude displayed when a KRA
automatically displayed unless 10A is the configured radio
True heading is selected by a altimeter.
remote switch or when the
selected primary NAV sensor is
GLIDE SLOPE/VERTICAL
an LNAV and it selects the True
mode of operation. Valid mag
NAVIGATION
var must be present before True When the selected primary NAV
heading can be selected by the sensor is ILS, MLS or LNAV with
LNAV. VNAV selected, a stationary
RADIO ALTITUDE white vertical deviation scale will
appear on the right or left side of
Beginning with software version the EHSI display as configured at
07, radio altitude provided by a the time of installation and certifi-
compatible radio altimeter may cation. This scale provides a ref-

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.11


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.12

EHSI Displays

erence for the vertical deviation with SW 15, during a GPS


pointer. The deviation pointer approach the vertical scale will
moves in relation to the scale to display the vertical annunciator
indicate glide path center with as “GP”.
respect to aircraft position. Additional configuration options
When the selected primary NAV selectable at the time of installa-
sensor is an on-side ILS, MLS, or tion and certification:
LNAV in the approach mode, the
vertical deviation pointer is green o Declutter GS on Back Course,
in color. If an off-side sensor is allows the vertical deviation scale to
selected for display, the deviation be in view at all times or only when
pointer changes to yellow alerting the selected course is within 105
the pilot that he has selected degrees of the aircraft heading.
other than his on-side NAV sen-
sor. A cyan ponter is displayed Vertical Scale Side, allows the
for VNAV provided by an on-side vertical deviation scale to be dis-
LNAV in the enroute mode. Full played on either the:
scale VNAV deviation represents o Right or
±1000 feet when provided by an o Left side of the EADI and
LNAV in the enroute mode. Prior EHSI display.
to 08 SW, full scale VNAV devia- VNAV Approach Mode
tion represents ±500 feet when Scaling, a configuration option
p rovided by an LNAV in the added by software 08, allows the
approach mode, however after following values for a full scale
08 SW, this scaling can be con- VNAV approach deviation.
figured to be ±1000, ±500, ±250, o 1000 feet
or ±200 feet. o 500 feet
o 250 feet
If the selected sensor is ILS, a o 200 feet
“GS” will be displayed in the verti-
cal pointer. When MLS is the Vertical Pointer Type, incorpo-
selected sensor, this annuncia- rated in software 06, allows the
tion will be “GS” for SW 06 and vertical pointer to be displayed as
07, but beginning with SW 08, one of three options
either “GS” or “GP” (for Glide o
Path) may be annunciated. G
When MLS is the selected sen- S
sor, the selected glide path angle
is displayed above the glideslope o
deviation scale. If VNAV is dis- G
played “FT” (feet) or “ANG” S
(angle) will be annunciated
above the vertical devi ation o
scale. “VN” will be annunciated if G
the selected sensor is an LNAV S
with VNAV selected. Beginning

4.1.12 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.13

EHSI Displays

Vertical Pointer Annunciation will become inaccurate during


for MLS A configuration option altitude changes.
added by software 08, allows the
choice of two pointer annuncia- In single LNAV systems the wind
tions when an MLS is the select- vector data may be displayed on
ed primary NAV sensor. all EHSI displays. In dual LNAV
installations with an LNAV select-
o GS ed as the primary nav source,
o GP that LNAV is the only source of
wind vector data. In dual LNAV
For a particular installation, refer installations with a primary nav
to the Aircraft Flight Manual Sup- source other than an LNAV, the
plement to determine the EFS wind vector data will be supplied
40/50 VNAV scale factors. only by the on-side LNAV with
software prior to 08, but begin-
If invalid or failed glide slope or ning with SW 08, the off-side
VNAV data is received, the verti- LNAV is used as a secondary
cal deviation bar and scale are source of wind vector informa-
removed and replaced with a tion.
RED X annunciation.
N o t e : If the selected LNAV is
Beginning with software 09, the configured as a Crouzet
vertical deviation bar and scale Omega, the wind vector will be
are decluttered without displaying displayed as the standard
a RED X when the deviation meteorological wind symbol.
information is provided in ARINC
429 format with a status of NO DRIFT ANGLE POINTER
COMPUTED DATA (NCD). The ( LNAV only)
RED X is still displayed for invalid
or missing data. The drift angle pointer is an
optional hollow cyan (green or
WIND VECTOR yellow in approach mode) trian-
gular pointer which is generated
o When the aircraft is equipped by some LNAVs and rotates
with the appropriate LNAV equip- about the outside of the compass
ment, an optional full time wind scale. Referenced to the lubber
vector indicating approximate line, the drift angle pointer repre-
wind direction and speed may be sents drift angle left or right of the
displayed in white in the upper aircraft heading. With respect to
left corner below the selected the compass scale, the drift
course. Wind vector information angle pointer represents aircraft
will be available only when valid actual ground track.
data is provided by the LNAV.
The information provided by this o The optional drift angle pointer
vector is advisory only. It is NOT may be displayed only when the
intended for use during approach LNAV is selected as the primary
as critical flight data because it NAV source and valid information

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.13


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.14

EHSI Displays

is present. If the pointer informa- 360 MAP DISPLAYS


tion becomes invalid it will be
removed from the display. Refer to Figures. 4.1.7 and 4.1.8
while reviewing 360 MAP DIS-
o An additional configuration PLAYS.
option was added with software
09 allowing a full time display of The EFS 40/50 provides two
the drift angle pointer. This allows basic map formats, a 360-degree
the drift angle pointer to be dis- map display about the aircraft
played when the selected prima- and an approximately 85-degree
ry NAV source is not an LNAV sectored map display in front of
and is intended to be used with the aircraft. Information which
the “Drift Angle Track” feature may be displayed includes way-
added to the weather radar inter- points, navaids, airports and
face by EFS software 09. See weather radar information. The
the section on Radar operation type and amount of data present-
for a detailed description. ed on the map will depend on the
interfacing equipment. When
LNAV MODE coupled with a compatible LNAV,
ANNUNCIATIONS such as the BENDIX/KING KNS
660, GNS XLS or KLN 90B, the
o A configuration option selec- EHSI can show up to 15 map
table at the time of installation symbols. These will include all
and certification allows the LNAV flight plan waypoints that are
mode annunciators to be dis- within the selected display range.
played above the three letter ver-
tical source annunciator “FMS”, In addition, the pilot can choose
“LOR”, or "GPS". The following to display either navaids or air-
annunciations will be displayed in ports that are located off the
the priority listed: flight-planned route. Up to 10
navaids or up to 4 airports can be
• MSG white flashing for five displayed as long as the total
seconds and then solid number of map symbols does not
•DR white flashing for five exceed 15.
seconds and then solid
•WRN white flashing for five In software version SW 06, up to
seconds and then solid (deleted 10 airports may be displayed.
in software 07 and higher)
•WPT white flashing for five In addition to the above, the #1
seconds and then solid and #2 bearing pointers can be
•HDG white overlayed to indicate the direction
•XTK white and distance to two additional
•APR white navaids or waypoints.

Waypoints referenced to the


selected VOR may be displayed

4.1.14 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.15

EHSI Displays

when coupled with a simple pointer, deviation bar and devia-


RNAV, such as the BENDIX/ tion scale are removed from with-
KING KNS 81. The simplest in the compass card display.
map data is provided by plotting When the primary NAV sensor
map symbols referenced to the provides distance and bearing
aircraft using bearing and dis- information the selected course
tance from the select bearing pointer is replaced with the
sensor. course line. If the primary NAV
sensor “TO” or “FROM” waypoint
Beginning with software 10, spe- or VOR is within the selected
cial waypoints without symbols map range, a movable course
are accepted by the EFS which line is drawn through its center.
may be used to display flight plan As the selected course is
legs without the waypoint sym- changed, the course line will
bols at the connecting points. rotate about the referenced point.
These waypoints are supplied by If the selected primary NAV sen-
some LNAV’s for search pattern sor is an approach on-side sen-
flight plans. sor, the inbound “TO” course line
is green and the outbound
Note: The following will address “FROM” course line is white. If
only those areas of the EFS the selected primary NAV sensor
40/50 map mode which are dif - is LNAV or enroute RNAV the
ferent from the standard com - inbound “TO” course line is cyan
pass presentations. (green in approach mode). Any
All map presentations provide time the cross-side sensor is
a traditional CDI display. selected as the primary NAV
sensor the inbound “TO” course
MAP 360 COMPASS CARD line is yellow.

The operation of the compass If the primary NAV sensor dis-


card remains the same in the tance or bearing information
Map mode as in the standard becomes invalid the NAV symbol
EHSI display. However, the out- and course line will be removed.
side of the compass card now “NO MAP” will be displayed to
performs a secondary function by alert the pilot that insufficient data
becoming the outer range ring for is present to calculate and plot
the Map display. the primary NAV sensor map.
“NO MAP” will also be displayed
SELECTED COURSE if the selected primary NAV sen-
sor, (e.g. ILS, ADF), does not
The alphanumeric course select provide distance and bearing
readout in the upper left corner of information. The lateral deviation
the display functions the same in scale will remain as long as valid
the map mode as in the standard bearing or deviation information
EHSI mode. The standard EHSI is present.
selected course pointer, to/from

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.15


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.16

EHSI Displays

MAP COURSE be displayed in light blue and the


DEVIATION INDICATOR #2 will be displayed in magenta
as are the standard bearing
A stationary white scale along pointers. If bearing or distance
the bottom center of the display information becomes invalid, the
provides reference for the course map symbol will be removed. If
deviation bar to indicate the posi- only the distance information
tion of the aircraft in relation to becomes invalid, the map symbol
the selected navigation course. will be removed and replaced
This course scale provides a with the standard bearing pointer.
conventional CDI (course devia-
tion indicator) presentation. Note: See BEARING POINTER,
When LOC is selected while in a under STANDARD EHSI DIS -
map mode, Back Course annun- PLAYS in this section for
ciation and CDI needle reversal details on the display of Mag -
is provided when the selected netic bearing pointers when
course is 105 degrees from the the compass card is True ref -
aircraft heading (results in a fly to erenced and the display of
situation). “BC”, in green, (yellow True bearing pointers when
“BC” if cross-side sensor is the compass card is magnetic
selected) is annunciated left of referenced.
center on the lateral deviation .
REFERENCE WAYPOINT
TO/FROM
When the joystick is interfaced to
To the right of the alphanumeric an EFS 40/50 system, it can be
Course Select a white “TO” or used to generate and move a
“FR” will replace the standard single Reference Waypoint on
EHSI TO/FROM pointer when in the display unit. This reference
non-ILS map modes. waypoint can then be entered
into the KNS 81, KNS 660, KLN
BEARING POINTER 88, or any other LNAV using an
appropriate GAMA 429 inter-
While in the map modes stan- face. The KNS 81 must have
dard EHSI bearing pointers are the graphic output bus.
displayed when the selected
bearing source does not have With an LNAV, RNAV, (or KNS
distance associated with it or 81 configured as a NAV) select-
when the distance is greater than ed for the primary nav sensor
the selected map distance. Once and during display of a NAV MAP
the bearing source falls within on the EHSI, initial movement of
display distance the bearing the joystick will create a refer-
pointer is removed and the asso- ence waypoint ahead of the air-
ciated map symbol is displayed. craft on the half range ring at the
current heading. This will be true
The #1 system map symbol will for both HSI and ARC map dis-

4.1.16 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.17

EHSI Displays

play formats. The reference appear in the same location rela-


waypoint will be a standard white tive to the display screen (inde-
waypoint symbol. Movement of pendent of range selection) the
the waypoint will be in any of the next time the joystick is activated.
eight directions commanded by However, a change of primary
the joystick. The rate of move- NAV sensor or display modes will
ment will start off slow and reset the invisible reference way-
increase in speed in two steps. point location to its initial starting
Return of the joystick to its cen- position.
ter, off position at any time will
reset the rate of movement to the Note: Systems with an MFD can
slowest speed. The reference have a joystick on the CP
waypoint location on the display 469A MFD control panel or a
screen and its rate of movement stand alone joystick. Addition -
relative to the display screen will al joysticks for the pilot or co-
be independent of the display pilot normally will not be
range selected. The reference installed. Systems without an
waypoint is not allowed to exit the MFD may have up to two joy -
compass. When an LNAV is sticks that are completely inde -
selected as the primary naviga- pendent of each other; one for
tion source, Lat/Lon coordinates the pilot and one for the co-
of the reference waypoint will be pilot. The pilot’s joystick will
displayed in the lower center of not be allowed to create or
the display. When a KNS 81 is move a waypoint on the co-
the active primary navigation pilot’s EHSI, and any waypoint
source, and it is not in the ILS created by the pilot can be
mode, radial and distance of the loaded only into the #1 RNAV
reference waypoint from the or #1 LNAV. Conversely, the
navaid in use by the KNS 81 will co-pilot’s joystick will not be
be displayed instead of Lat/Lon allowed to create or move a
coordinates. The reference way- waypoint on the pilot’s EHSI,
point position information can be and any waypoint created by
transferred to the LNAV or KNS the co-pilot can be loaded only
81 that is selected as the primary into the #2 RNAV or #2 LNAV.
navigation sensor, by pressing
the ENTER button while the ref- RANGE RING
erence waypoint and its coordi-
nates are displayed. The coordi- A light blue range ring located
nates of the reference waypoint half way between the center of
will remain displayed for at least the symbolic aircraft and the out-
10 seconds and disappear from side of the map compass scale
the display within 15 seconds aids in determining distance of
after activating the ENTER but- radar returns and/or position of
ton. If the reference waypoint is navaids in relation to the aircraft.
not moved for 20 seconds, it will Off the right wing of the symbolic
disappear from view and will re- aircraft, adjacent to the range

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.17


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.18

EHSI Displays

ring is the range ring distance. selected range does not match
The range ring represents half one allowed by the radar, “WX
the distance to the outer range FLT” will be annunciated in the
ring of the compass scale. The weather radar fault/warning posi-
available ranges, selectable from tion. When the 1000 NM range
the EFS 40/50 are 5, 10, 20, 40, is selected “RANGE” is displayed
80,160, 240, 320 and 1000 nm. and the weather radar is placed
in standby. If the EFS 40/50 is
Note: Systems which have the the only display media for the
RDR 1400 interfaced with the weather radar, the radar will be
EFS 40/50 will display weath - placed in standby when weather
er ranges of .5, 1 and 2 NM. is not selected for display.
However, the NAV MAP fea -
ture is not supported on these Note: EHSI installations with the
shorter ranges. BENDIX/KING RDR 2000 or
360-DEGREE MAP RDS series radar provide dual
range selection by allowing the
WX RADAR (IF EQUIPPED) radar indicator and EHSI or
Refer to Figure 4.1.7 while dual EHSIs to select indepen -
reviewing this section. dent ranges. Only one source
of radar mode, tilt and gain is
If a compatible ARINC 708 supported. When the ranges
weather radar such as the selected on the two controlling
BENDIX/KING RDR 2000 or indicators do not match, the
RDS series is installed, weather weather presentation will be
information may be selected for updated on alternating sweeps
display. When selected, weather of the radar antenna. Exam -
information will transparently ple: if pilot’s EHSI is updated
overlay the existing navigation on the right sweep then the
data. Light blue dotted lines rep- radar indicator will be updated
resent the weather radar scan on the left sweep or vice versa.
limits. In installations capable of pro -
viding weather information on
Depending on the installation, the three displays, the display
EFS 40/50 may act as a weather without radar range control
radar range controller or as a must match one of the control -
simple remote display when the ling displays in order to pre -
EHSI has weather selected and sent weather. If the range
matches the radar range. As a does not match, “WX FLT” will
display only, if weather is select- be annunciated in the weather
ed for display and the EHSI map radar fault/warning position.
range does not match the select-
ed weather radar range “WX Four data lines are reserved
FLT” will be annunciated in the below the primary NAV sensor
weather radar fault/warning posi- source annunciator to display
tion. As a range controller, if the radar information. The first line

4.1.18 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.19

EHSI Displays

displays special performance get alert symbol during an active


feature annunciations such as target alert, however “TGT” will
ARL (automatic range limiting). not be displayed to indicate the
The second line annunciates the enabled condition.
standard radar modes WX, WXA
or MAP. The third line provides a A yellow dashed line, originating
digital readout of tilt angle dis- at the symbolic aircraft and
played in tenths of a degree pre- extending to the edge of the
ceded by an arrow pointing up or compass card, appears on the
down to indicate tilt direction. If weather display when either the
Auto Tilt is activated, an “A” will track left or track right button is
follow the tilt arrow. The fourth pressed on the radar control
line will display radar faults and panel. The track line will be auto-
warnings. The radar faults are matically removed within 15 sec-
prioritized. When more than one onds after the button is released.
fault or warning occurs the one
with the highest priority will be RDR 1400
displayed. WEATHER RADAR
A complete interface to the RDR
Target Alert is a feature provided
1400 Weather Radar became
by the RDR 2000 weather radar
available with the release of EFS
that is fully supported by EFS
software version 09. This inter-
with software version 10. A white
face requires an indicator to be
“TGT” annunciation in the weath-
er radar failure/warning field indi- used as the source of all radar
control data except for range
cates that the target alert feature
which is selected on the EFS
of the RDR 2000 is enabled.
control panel. All RDR 1 4 0 0
When a target is actually detect-
ranges are supported including
ed that satisfies the conditions for
2.0, 1.0, and 0.5 nm. All weather
a target alert, the white “TGT”
changes to a yellow “TGTALRT” and search primary modes, the
beacon secondary mode, and
and an arc shaped symbol is dis-
RDR 1400 faults are annunciated
played at the top center of the
in the radar information fields
weather display. Consult the
below the primary NAV sensor
RDR 2000 pilot’s guide for more
annunciation on the EHSI or
detail.
MFD. The primary and sec-
Note: Wx gain must be max and ondary modes are annunciated
the ART must be scanning as shown in the following table:
horizontally before the Target
Alert feature is enabled. Target
Alert is not enabled in the VP
mode.

EFS with 09 software interfaced


to the RDR 2000 will display
“TGTALRT” in white and the tar-
Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.19
Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.20

EHSI Displays

All standard beacons (Type A) depicting three different levels of


are displayed as two white arcs lightning intensity:
separated by 3.6 to 13 nm (sepa-
ration distance determined by
beacon ID code). All DO 172
(Type B) beacons are displayed
as two white framing arcs 1.2 nm
apart with one to four additional
beacon ID arcs between the two Lightning information will only be
framing arcs. When a beacon is displayed while weather is select-
identified, its ID code preceeded ed for display on the EFS. Some
by an “A” or “B” to indicate bea- versions of Radar Control Panels
con type is displayed in blue at (RCP) have a lightning select
the beacon location on the EFS button (see section 2.3) which
weather display just beyond the will alternately select and de-
closest white arc. select lightning for display, how-
ever when selected, the lightning
RDR 1400 beacon and search data will be in addition to the
gains, and antenna tilt value are weather radar information if both
not annunciated on the EFS. are provided. The weather radar
may be placed in standby if only
Note: A limited interface to the
lightning information is desired.
RDR 1400 is provided with
EFS software versions before
09. TEST, STBY, and WX are A single lightning data field is
located immediately above the
the only modes annunciated.
weather radar data fields. Three
Beacon and Search modes are
annunciations are possible in this
not annunciated. Beacon sym -
field as shown in figure 4.1.8 at
bols are displayed as white
the end of this section. The
arcs at the proper location, but
without an ID number. annunciation “ON” preceeded by
the lightning symbol indicates
that lightning information has
LIGHTNING DETECTION been selected for display and the
lightning sensor is operational.
Up to 63 grey colored lightning
The annunciation “OFF” preceed-
cell symbols can be displayed on
ed by the lightning symbol indi-
the EHSI or MFD displays when cates that lightning has been de-
provided by a compatable light-
selected using the lightning
ning sensor. Unlike weather
select button on the RCP. This
radar information, lightning data
annunciation is only presented
may be presented in all 360
while a weather mode is selected
degrees of display area. Range
on the EFS and will not be dis-
selection for all lightning data dis- played in installations without a
played on EFS is controlled by
lightning select button on the
the EFS control panel. The EFS
RCP. A fault condition is indicat-
will display the following symbols

4.1.20 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.21

EHSI Displays

ed by the annunciation “FLT” pre- presented when ever the select-


ceeded by the lightning symbol. ed primary NAV sensor is either
Possible faults are invalid or an ILS or ADF with the map
missing 429 data from the light- mode selected. The LNAV map
ning sensor. Therefore, selecting will be presented all in white to
lightning for display with power show that the information being
removed from the lightning sen- displayed is not to be used as pri-
sor will cause a FLT annunciation mary navigation information. The
on the EFS. purpose of the LNAV map infor-
mation being presented is to pro-
FULL TIME LNAV MAP vide the pilot better orientation
between his present position and
o Incorporated in software 05, is intended flight plan, mainly for
an option selectable at the time use during the phase of the
of installation and certification. It approach while being vectored
allows the LNAV map to be dis- for the intercept. Primary naviga-
played when the selected prima- tion must be accomplished
ry NAV sensor is either an ILS or according to the raw data pre-
ADF in the map mode. sented by the selected primary
NAV sensor being displayed on
Before software 05 or after soft- the lateral and vertical deviation
ware 05 without the full time pointers, not by the LNAV map
LNAV map configuration select-
ed, when the selected primary The LNAV map will be displayed
NAV sensor is either an ILS or only if an LNAV is installed on the
ADF with the map mode select- same side as the selected ILS or
ed, the “NO MAP” message will ADF primary NAV sensor and the
be annunciated since sufficient map mode is being displayed.
data is not provided to create a
map presentation. However, if a N o t e : Extreme care must be
bearing pointer sensor is select- taken when this mode is used
ed which provides bearing and not to focus on the LNAV map.
distance information, an appro- Depending on the LNAV being
priate map symbol will be dis- used, the accuracy may be off
played if the selected map range several miles, providing oppo -
is greater than the distance to the site fly-to commands than the
navaid or waypoint. If the select- ILS or ADF. It is a must that
ed range is less, a normal bear- the primary NAV sensor data
ing pointer will be displayed. be the data flown.

If the full time LNAV MAP option Map not certified for primary
is selected, the LNAV map will be navigation.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.21


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.22

EHSI Displays

ARC (EXPANDED SECTORED MODE) DISPLAYS


Refer to Figure 4.1.9 while noticeable difference in the ARC
reviewing ARC DISPLAYS. mode is that the digital orange
readout of selected heading is
The expanded sectored (ARC) displayed only when the heading
format provides an enlarged dis- bug is not completely in view. In
play of weather radar information this event the heading readout
and increased resolution of navi- appears on the side of the com-
gation data due to the enlarged pass scale closer to the heading
compass scale presentations. bug’s hidden position.

Note: The following will address COURSE DEVIATION


only those areas of the EFS INDICATOR (EHSI ARC
40/50 ARC mode which are NON-MAP FORMAT)
different from the standard
EHSI compass or MAP pre - The rotating white course devia-
sentations. tion scale operates the same in
all non-map modes. The differ-
HDG BUG ences in the ARC modes are
(ALL ARC FORMAT MODES) location and size: the scale is
moved to the bottom center of
Heading bug operation is the the display and is slightly
same in all modes. The only reduced in size.

4.1.22 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.23

EHSI Displays

CUSTOM (NON STANDARD EHSI) DISPLAYS


The displays covered in this sec- different from the standard
tion are custom displays, created EHSI presentations.
at the request of specific cus-
tomers to satisfy unique require- w COMPASS CARD
ments. Every attempt was made
to ensure these displays followed The map compass card is used
standard EFS 40/50 colors, sym- in the DOPP mode, the symbolic
bology and methodology. In aircraft however, is the larger one
some cases this was not possi- used in the normal EHSI mode.
ble, it is therefore, most important
to read the following information w DOPPLER VELOCITY BARS
and ensure you have a very good
understanding of the display and Green bars, the length of the
its intended use. If there are any compass card’s diameter, repre-
questions concerning the follow- sent the aircraft’s velocity
ing displays, contact the installing left/right (Vx) and fore/aft (Vy) as
agency or a Honeywell factory referenced to the symbolic air-
representative for additional infor- craft. The intersection of the two
mation. bars provide the sum of the two
velocity components.
DOPPLER
If the Doppler velocity information
Refer to Figure 4.1.10 while becomes invalid or failed the
reviewing the DOPPLER DIS- velocity bars will be removed and
PLAY. a RED X will be displayed in the
center of the compass.
o Incorporated in software 04,
the Doppler mode, annunciated w VELOCITY AND
as DOPP, provides navigation TARGET SCALE
information from a Doppler NAV
sensor. Primary use of this Two white concentric circles
mode is helicopter related, with inside the compass card provide
the intended purpose of search reference for the Doppler velocity
and rescue hover. The DOPP bars and LNAV target waypoint.
mode is displayed on the EHSI When used as a reference for the
as dual concentric velocity and Doppler velocity these circles
target range circles inside the represent 10 and 20 KTS with
compass card. Cross bars repre- the compass card representing
sent components of the aircraft’s 30 KTS of velocity. When used
left/right and fore/aft velocity. as a reference for the target way-
point they represent .2 NM and .4
Note: The following will address NM with the compass card repre-
only those areas of the EFS senting .6 NM.
40/50 Doppler mode which are

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.23


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.24

EHSI Displays

The symbolic aircraft is one sixth


the size of the compass card; If the autopilot fails, “COUPLER”
making it 5 KTS or .1 NM to in RED with a RED X through it
wing tips or tail and nose. will be annunciated in the upper
left corner and the tendency cir-
w LNAV GROUND SPEED cle will be decluttered.
AND READOUT
o An option selectable at the
A cyan display of ground speed time of installation and certifica-
information from the LNAV is pro- tion provides an interface for sys-
vided in the upper right corner. tems that do not have an autopi-
lot input. This configuration
If the ground speed information option may also be selected if the
becomes invalid or failed, a cyan RED “COUPLER” warning flag is
FMS with a RED X drawn not desired when interfaced with
through it will be displayed in the an autopilot.
distance location.
w MEMORY
w WIND VECTOR
INFORMATION If the Doppler NAV sensor goes
into the memory mode and advis-
If an appropriate LNAV is es the EHSI, “MEMORY” in
installed and is providing valid orange will be displayed above
information, wind information will the symbolic aircraft, and the
be displayed in its normal loca- velocity bars and circles will
tion. See WIND VECTOR under change to orange to alert the
STANDARD EHSI DISPLAYS for pilot.
additional information.
w HEADING BUG
w TARGET WAYPOINT
Software version 05 added the
A cyan waypoint symbol will be heading bug to the Doppler dis-
displayed representing target play and activated the Heading
position if an appropriate LNAV is datum and analog deviation out-
installed and is providing valid puts for autopilot coupling.
information.

w TENDENCY CIRCLE

A green circle, the diameter of


which corresponds to 5 kts, is
displayed if an appropriate
autopilot is installed and is pro-
viding valid command data. If
the autopilot indicates winchman
control, the circle will be dashed.

4.1.24 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.25

EHSI Displays

CABLE left/right component (Px) and


fore/aft component (Py) as refer-
Refer to Figure 4.1.11 while enced to the symbolic aircraft.
reviewing the CABLE DISPLAY. The intersection of the two bars
provide the vector sum of the two
Incorporated in software 04, the position components, or actual
cable mode, annunciated as angular position of the cable ref-
CAB, provides navigation infor- erenced to the aircraft.
mation from a cable position sen-
sor. Primary use of this mode is If the cable sensor information
helicopter related, with the becomes invalid or failed the
intended purpose of search and position angle bars will be
rescue hover, and heavy lift oper- removed and a RED X will be
ations. The CAB mode is dis- displayed in the center of the
played on the EHSI as dual con- compass.
centric circles on the compass
card. Cross bars represent cable w FUNNEL SCALE
angular position left/right and
fore/aft relative to the aircraft.. Two concentric circles inside the
compass card and compass card
Only one cable sensor system azimuth ring itself provide refer-
may be interfaced to the EFS ence for the cable position angle
40/50 at a time. If more than one bars. A white inner circle repre-
system is interfaced, it will have sents 6 degrees of cable deflec-
to be externally switched into the tion. A yellow circle represents
EHSI. 12 degrees. The compass card
azimuth ring represents 18
Note: The following will address degrees of cable displacement.
only those areas of the EFS
40/50 Cable mode which are The symbolic aircraft is one sixth
different from the standard the size of the compass card;
EHSI presentations. making it 3 degrees to wing tips,
tail and nose.
w COMPASS CARD
w WIND VECTOR
The map compass card is used INFORMATION
in the CAB mode, the symbolic
aircraft however, is the larger one If an appropriate LNAV is
used in the normal EHSI mode. installed and is providing valid
information, wind information will
w ANGLE BARS be displayed in its normal loca-
tion. See WIND VECTOR under
Green bars, the length of the STANDARD EHSI DISPLAYS for
larger circle’s diameter, represent additional information.
the cable’s position angle

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.25


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.26

EHSI Displays

w OPTIMUM CABLE HOMING


POSITION CIRCLE
Refer to Figure 4.1.12 while re-
A green circle, 1/12 the diameter viewing the HOMING DISPLAY.
of the compass card, is displayed
if an appropriate autopilot is Incorporated in software 05, the
installed and is providing valid Homing mode, annunciated as
command data. If the autopilot HOM, provides navigation infor-
indicates winchman control, the mation from a homing sensor.
circle will be dashed. Primary use of this mode is to
provide the pilot left-right naviga-
If the autopilot fails, “COUPLER” tion information to a beacon.
in RED with a RED X through it The HOM mode is displayed in
will be annunciated in the upper much the same way as the stan-
left corner and the tendency cir- dard EHSI. Since the homing
cle will be decluttered. sensor provides only left-right
guidance information, the
o An option (YES - NO COU- alphanumeric selected course
PLER), selectable at the time of display is removed from the
installation and certification, pro- upper left corner as is the course
vides an interface for systems pointer head and tail. The devia-
that do not have an autopilot tion scale and bar are displayed
input. This configuration option in a horizontal manner and do
also may be selected if the RED not rotate with the compass card.
“COUPLER” warning flag is not The display provided resembles
desired when interfaced with an a standard EHSI with a heading
autopilot. failure. However, the compass
card will function normally.
w THRUST COMMAND
Two homing sensors may be
If the cable position sensor pro- interfaced to the EFS 40/50 at a
vides the thrust command, the time.
angle position bars and 12-
degree funnel circle change to Since the basic Homing display
orange. closely resembles the standard
system, all normal display
w HEADING BUG options are provided in the Hom-
ing mode. All 360 EHSI and
Software version 05 added the ARC formats are operational as
heading bug to the Cable display is the addition of bearing point-
and activated the heading datum ers.
and analog deviation outputs for
autopilot coupling. Course datum
output is not active in this mode.

4.1.26 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.27

EHSI Displays

Note: The following will address provides a reference for the sen-
only those areas of the EFS sitivity pointer, which moves in
40/50 Homing mode which are relation to the scale to indicate
different from the standard signal strength being received by
EHSI presentations. the Homing sensor.

w LATERAL DEVIATION BAR The sensitivity pointer will have


“SN” displayed inside it to advise
A green bar, the length of a stan- the pilot of the type of data he is
dard EHSI D-Bar, represents fly monitoring.
left, fly right commands as refer-
enced to the symbolic aircraft. When the on-side sensor is
selected for display the sensitivity
If the Homing sensor information pointer is green in color. When
becomes invalid or failed the the off-side sensor is selected for
deviation bar and scale will be display the sensitivity pointer
removed and a RED X will be changes to yellow alerting the
displayed in the center of the pilot he has select other than his
compass. on-side NAV sensor.

SENSITIVITY SCALE If invalid or failed sensitivity data


AND POINTER is received, the sensitivity devia-
tion pointer and scale are
If the installed Homing sensor removed.
provides a sensitivity output, a
stationary white vertical sensitivi- N o t e : The scale and pointer
ty scale will appear on the right or used to display sensit ivity
left side of the EHSI display as information is the same as that
configured at the time of installa- used for Glideslope and Verti -
tion and certification. This scale cal Navigation.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.27


Section 4.1mp 9/9/10 1:45 AM Page 4.1.28

EHSI Displays

*This page intentionally left blank.

4.1.28 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.1 POmp 9/9/10 1:57 AM Page 4.1.29

EHSI Displays

Figure 4.1.3
TYPICAL EHI 40/50 DISPLAY

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.29


Section 4.1 POmp 9/9/10 1:57 AM Page 4.1.30

EHSI Displays

Figure 4.1.4
LOSS OF HEADING DISPLAY

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.30


Section 4.1 POmp 9/9/10 1:57 AM Page 4.1.31

EHSI Displays

Figure 4.1.5
EHSI SYMBOL DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.31


Section 4.1 POmp 9/9/10 1:57 AM Page 4.1.32

EHSI Displays

Figure 4.1.6
EHSI SYMBOL DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.32


Section 4.1 POmp 9/9/10 1:57 AM Page 4.1.33

EHSI Displays

Figure 4.1.7
EHSI MAP SYMBOL DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.33


Section 4.1 POmp 9/9/10 1:57 AM Page 4.1.34

EHSI Displays

Figure 4.1.8
EHSI MAP SYMBOL DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.34


Section 4.1 POmp 9/9/10 1:57 AM Page 4.1.35

EHSI Displays

Figure 4.1.9
EHSI ARC MAP SYMBOL DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.35


Section 4.1 POmp 9/9/10 1:57 AM Page 4.1.36

EHSI Displays

Figure 4.1.10
EHSI DOPPLER SYMBOL DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.36


Section 4.1 POmp 9/9/10 1:58 AM Page 4.1.37

EHSI Displays

Figure 4.1.11
EHSI CABLE SYMBOL DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.37


Section 4.1 POmp 9/9/10 1:58 AM Page 4.1.38

EHSI Displays

Figure 4.1.12
EHSI HOMING SYMBOL DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.38


Section 4.1 POmp 9/9/10 1:58 AM Page 4.1.39

EHSI Displays

Figure 4.1.13
EHSI FAULT ANNUNCIATION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.39


Section 4.1 POmp 9/9/10 1:58 AM Page 4.1.40

EHSI Displays

Figure 4.1.14
EHSI CAT II SYMBOLOGY

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.1.40


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.1

EADI Displays

EADI DISPLAYS
NORMAL ATTITUDE DISPLAY
PITCH ATTITUDE requested. While synchronized,
two white plus(+) signs will indi-
A moving white simulated hori- cate the location of the absolute
zon line rotates angularly with the horizon. A momentary (push on -
roll of the aircraft and moves up push off) action switch must be
and down with the pitch of the used to request pitch offset sync
aircraft. Blue sky above the hori- or return to absolute pitch with no
zon and brown ground below the offset.
horizon align with the horizon line
as it follows the aircraft’s pitch Note: Pitch offset sync is a fea -
and roll. Pitch scale reference ture intended for use on rotary
marks extend above and below wing aricraft only, it is not
the horizon line indicating 5,10, intended for use on fixed wing
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, aircraft. If a power reset occurs
60, 65, 70, 75, 80 and 90 (this includes ADI Down and/or
degrees. Refer to Figure 4.2.3. Composite modes), the pitch
offset sync will be turned off
o Beginning with software ver- and the attitude display
sion 13, Pitch Offset Sync can be returned to normal.
configured to allow the displayed
horizon and pitch scale to be off- In the event of a pitch or roll atti-
set by up to 10° above or below tude failure, the pitch scale, roll
the absolute source. Intended for scale, roll index pointer, blue sky
use in rotary wing aricraft only, and brown ground are removed
the offset (10° maximum) allows from the display. Centered just
synchronization of the displayed below the roll scale, a RED
horizon to the current aircraft “ATTITUDE FAIL” enclosed in a
pitch when synchronization is RED box will be annunciated.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.1


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.2

EADI Displays

ROLL ATTITUDE brown ground raster between 40


and 85 degrees, and in the blue
The EFS 40/50 provides two sky raster between 50 and 85
options for displaying roll attitude. degrees.
The option selected for a particu-
lar installation is first determined In the event of a pitch or roll atti-
by certification requirements of the tude failure, the pitch scale, blue
aircraft, and secondly by pilot pref- sky, brown ground and roll index
erence. The most common roll pointer are removed from the dis-
attitude display for four and five play. Centered just below the roll
inch instruments is a fixed roll scale a RED “ATTITUDE FAIL”
scale and movable index (sky enclosed in a RED box will be
pointer). The most common roll annunciated.
attitude display for three inch
instruments is a moveable roll ROLL INDICATOR
scale and fixed index (roll) pointer.
The roll scale provides reference A filled white or yellow triangular
marks at 10, 20, 30, 45 and 60 pointer positioned just below the
degrees. To allow easier recog- roll scale. If the Sky pointer
nition of the 30, 60 and 45 option has been selected at the
degree marks, the 30 and 60 time of installation and certifica-
degree marks are longer extend- tion, the roll indicator will be white
ing further into the center of the and rotate with the pitch scale as
display and the 45 degree mark the roll scale is fixed. If the Roll
is displayed in the form of a hol- pointer option is selected at the
low triangle. Refer to Figure time of installation and certifica-
4.2.4. tion, the roll indicator will be yel-
low and fixed in the centered
o An optional configuration item, position as the roll scale rotates.
selected at the time of installation
and certification, allows the o Sky Pointer Roll Scale
E F S 40/50 to declutter
nonessential navigation data in
the event an unusual attitude is
encountered. Removal of the
data will occur if pitch angle
exceeds +30 or -20 degrees, or if Level Attitude
bank angle exceeds 65 degrees.
Red chevrons, used to indicate
the best unusual attitude recov-
ery direction (not necessarily
right side up), will appear in the
20˚ Right Roll

4.2.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.3

EADI Displays

o Roll Indicator Scale


Note: The display of perspec -
tive lines with the delta (trian -
gle) shaped aircraft symbol is
considered unacceptable by
some certification agencies.
Level Attitude
The EFS 40/50 offers two sym-
bolic aircraft symbols, the Bull’s
Eye and Delta. Selection of the
single cue command bars will
present a delta aircraft symbol,
while selection on the double cue
command bars will provide a tra-
20˚ Right Roll ditional bull’s eye aircraft symbol.
In the event of an attitude failure,
the roll indicator is removed from
the display.

PERSPECTIVE LINES Aircraft Reference Delta

o A display option selected at the


time of installation and certifica-
tion. Orange lines extending 30
and 45 degrees downward from Aircraft Reference Bulls's Eye
the center of the horizon line pro-
vide additional pilot cues in steep HEADING TAPE
turns. Refer to Figure 4.2.4.
o An optional configuration item,
Note: The display of perspec - selected at the time of installation
tive lines with the delta (trian - and certification, allows a white
gle) shaped aircraft symbol is heading tape with or without the
considered unacceptable by selected heading bug to be dis-
some certification agencies. played along the top of the hori-
zon line. Index marks appear
SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT every 5 degrees with heading
annunciation displayed every 30
Located in the center of the dis- degrees.
play is the fixed orange aircraft
symbol. The pitch and roll atti- In the event heading data
tudes of the aircraft are displayed becomes unavailable or invalid, a
by the relationship of the fixed stationary RED “HDG” enclosed
symbolic aircraft and the mov- in a RED box will be displayed
able horizon. The symbolic air- above and to the right of the
craft is flown to satisfy the com- symbolic aircraft.
mand cues of the flight director. FLIGHT DIRECTOR

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.3


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.4

EADI Displays

COMMAND BARS failure, the command bars are


removed and a stationary RED
Flight director commands are dis- FD enclosed in a RED box is dis-
played as moving green or played just below the right 60
magenta bars when the flight degree roll mark.
director is engaged. Located in AUTOPILOT/FLIGHT
the center of the EADI display DIRECTOR MODE
about the fixed aircraft symbol, ANNUNCIATION
indicating roll and pitch required
to satisfy the computed flight w STANDARD 429
director commands. Switching AUTOPILOT/FLIGHT
the flight director “OFF” or an DIRECTOR MODE
ANNUNCIATION
invalid “FD” will cause the com-
mand bars to be removed. o When interfaced with an
appropriate 429 digital autopilot,
Options selectable at the time of such as the Bendix/King KFC
configuration allow the display of 500, KFC 400, KFC 325 or KFC
either: 225, an optional configuration
item, selected at the time of
o Single cue command bars installation and certification,
o Dual cue command bars allows the EFS 40/50 to annunci-
o Pilot selectable between ate a combination of autopilot
single or dual cue via an and flight director modes.
external switch. Engaged modes are annunciated
The single cue command bars in green along the top of the dis-
will present a delta aircraft sym- play and armed modes are
bol, while selection of the double annunciated in white just below
cue will provide a traditional bull’s the engaged modes. Only “GS”,
eye aircraft symbol. Command “GP”, “VNAV” and “ALT” will be
bar color may also be configured annunciated in white, in the Verti-
as either green or magenta. cal Arm 2 field immediately below
the engaged modes. Only “GS”,
“GP”, and “ALT” will be displayed
in the Vertical Arm 1 field imme-
Single Cue Command Bars diately below the Vertical Arm 2
field. The engaged modes will
flash for a mimimum of 5 sec-
onds when disengaged and
beginning with software 0702,
the engaged mode annunciation
color will change to yellow while
flashing.

The following tables and figure


Dual Cue Command Bars describe the annunciations and
In the event of a flight director location in which they may be

4.2.4 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.5

EADI Displays

displayed.
AP/FD MODE ANNUNCIATIONS
EFS COUPLED
SW STATUS MISC BANK CWS CMD
AP YD MODES LIMIT DATA
04 and AP YD SR HB CWS
above
Altitude
05 and Airspeed
above MACH
Vertical
speed
PTRM
06 and LTRM
above PTCH
ROLL
YAW
SAS RTRM BL30
09 and or YTRM ----
above AP BL01
13 and
above AP SAS DNT
(KFC 500)

AP/FD MODE ANNUNCIATIONS


Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.5
Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.6

EADI Displays

Software release 06 added the toward the active side.


following autopilot failure warning
annunciations. They are listed in Beginning with software release
order of priority and will be dis- 09, the KFC 500 autopilot cou-
played in the SR field: pled status “SAS” may be dis-
played in place of “AP”. As with
• PTRM RED = pitch the “AP” annunciation, “SAS” will
auto/manual trim fail be either green or yellow to indi-
• LTRM RED = lateral autotrim
fail cate active and inactive sides
• PTCH RED = elevator servo respectively and flashing red
failure when disconnected. A steady red
• ROLL RED = aileron servo SAS annunciation indicates an
failure
• YAW RED = rudder servo autopilot power loss. See the
failure KFC 500 pilots guide for more
• PITCH YELLOW = elevator information.
mistrim
• ROLL YELLOW = aileron Yaw damper, if engaged, may
mistrim
• YAW YELLOW = rudder flash RED when disconnected
mistrim depending on the autopilot type.

Two additional failure annuncia- Beginning with software version


tions were added by software 05, the following autopilot com-
release 09 to accomodate the mand reference data will be dis-
KFC 500. played in green when interfaced
with the KFC 400/500:
• RTRM RED = roll auto trim fail • AIRSPEED
• YTRM RED = yaw autotrim fail 0 to 512KTS in 1KT
increments.
The KFC 500 will use these two • MACH
annunciations instead of “LTRM”. 0 to 4.096M in
If the flight director data becomes 0.005M increments.
invalid, a RED “FD” enclosed in a • VERTICAL SPEED
+/-20,480F/M in
RED box will be displayed at the
100F/M increments.
right center of the display. • ALTITUDE
0 to 65536FT in 10FT
If the autopilot has been on and increments.
then disengaged, a RED “AP” will • HIGH PROFILE
be annunciated in the upper left “H”
hand corner. Depending on the • NORMAL PROFILE
autopilot type, the RED “AP” may “N”
flash when disengaged. • LOW PROFILE
In dual autopilot installations, the “L”
active side is annunciated by a N o t e : Lateral/vertical modes
green “AP” and the inactive side and other annunciators are
will be annunciated by a yellow determined by the auto-
“AP” with a yellow arrow pointing pilot/flight director system
installed.
4.2.6 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10
Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.7

EADI Displays

Two additional features were same field. Acceptance of select-


added with 09 EFS software to ed heading from the FCC allows
accomodate the KFC 500 autopi- the pilot to use the Cyclic Beep
lot. Numerical bank limit annunci- Trim (CBT) switch to move the
ation and selected heading input heading bug displayed on the
from the flight control computer EHSI compass card while the
(FCC). The numerical bank limit heading select mode is active.
is annunciated in green as
“BLXX” where XX is the bank Beginning with software veresion
limit in degrees (1 to 30) provided 14, the KFC 225 autopilot was
by the FCC. This annunciation added, and REV is annunciated
has priority over “HB” (half bank) instead of BC for the KFC 225
which can be displayed in the only.

w SFIM CDV AUTOPILOT/ top of the EADI and armed


FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODE modes are displayed in white on
ANNUNCIATION the second line from the top on
the EADI.
o When the EFS 40/50 is config-
ured to interface with the SFIM The following annunciation modi-
CDV 155 Autopilot/Flight Direc- fiers are also provided by the
tor, a unique set of armed and SFIM CDV Autopilot/Flight Direc-
engaged lateral, vertical and col- tor:
lective mode annunciations will • Green Autopilot Coupled Box
be displayed. Engaged modes around the mode annunciator
are displayed in green across the • Flashing Yellow Excessive
Deviation Chevron
LATERAL VERTICAL COLLECTIVE
BC ALT ALT
CPOS CPOS CHT
GSPD GA CRHT
HDG GS GA
HOV GSPD GS
LOC HOV HHT
NAV IAS TDWN
TST TDWN TST
VORA TST TUP
AZ TUP VS
BAZ VS

SFIM CDV ENGAGED MODES


LATERAL VERTICAL COLLECTIVE
BC CPOS CHT
CPOS GS GS
LOC TDWN TDWN
NAV
OSS
VORA

SFIM CDV ARMED MODES

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.7


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.8

EADI Displays

• Yellow Degraded sensor color


RADIO ALTIMETER Radio altimeter (RA) height dis-
play range is -20 to 2,500 feet.
o The radio altimeter display is Between -20 and 100 feet, height
composed of three elements; will be displayed in five foot incre-
radio altimeter (RA) height, deci- ments. Above 100 feet, height
sion height (DH) set and decision will be displayed in 10 foot incre-
height (DH) alert. In the upper ments for EFS software before
right corner of the display, a field 09. Beginning with 09 software,
of white alphanumeric data pro- RA altitude is displayed in 5 foot
vides radio altimeter height and increments between -20 and 500
annunciation. In the lower right feet with 10 foot increments dis-
corner of the display, a green played above 500 feet. Selection
alphanumeric field displays the of decision height and activation
selected DH. This field is active of “DH” alert will be in 1 foot
only when the DH set knob is increments. The maximum and
active or when the radio altimeter minimum height displayed will
is providing valid height data. To depend on the radio altimeter
the right and above center of the installed. Some radio altimeters
display, a yellow “DH” alert is dis- provide linear altitude information
played in a black box outlined in only to 1,000 feet. Refer to the
yellow. operators handbook for the par-
ticular radio altimeter installed for
Depending on the type of radio details on the possible display
altimeter installed, the elements range.
of data displayed may vary. An
altimeter which fully supports the Note: 20 ft is the minimum alti -
interface will provide display of all tude displayed when a KRA
three elements; RA, DH set and 10A is the configured radio
“DH” alert. Altimeters which do altimeter.
not fully support the interface
may be limited to the “DH” alert To annunciate an operational
annunciation. In such an installa- radio altimeter which has not
tion, selected DH will not be dis- acquired a valid ground
played. DH set is accomplished response, three white dashes are
outside the EFS 40/50 system on placed in the height data field. If
the radio altimeter. The the radio altimeter has failed,
EFS 40/50 receives an external three RED dashes are placed in
command from the altimeter the height data field. In either
which activates the “DH” alert case, if the rising runway is dis-
annunciation. played, it will remain fixed at the
bottom of its scale and moves
laterally to indicate the LOC or
MLS deviation.

4.2.8 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.9

EADI Displays

sky/ground display is reduced in


DECISION HEIGHT SET size to provide a high contrast
black background for various
o A part time green alphanumer- scales and annunciations. A ris-
ic readout, located in the lower ing runway symbol is provided for
right corner, displays the letters the display of expanded left/right
DH and selected decision height deviation and runway closure
in feet as manually established during the final 200 feet of radio
by the DH set control knob. With altimeter height. The rising run-
the control pulled out, the DH set way center line, referenced to the
value is displayed and may be lateral deviation scale, will pro-
set regardless of aircraft altitude. vide LOC, MLS or GPS devia-
With the control knob “in”, DH is tion. A “LOC”, MLS, or “GPS”
displayed only for radio altimeter annunciation identifies the sensor
altitude less than 2500 feet AGL. in use. This annunciation is not
The DH set display range is from provided after 07 software if only
“OFF” (-1 ft.) to the RA declutter one sensor type is used. A verti-
value (2,500’). Refer to Figure cal scale is provided to display an
4.2.2. approach glidepath. Refer to
Figure 4.2.2.
DECISION HEIGHT ALERT
EXPANDED LATERAL
When the radio altimeter height DEVIATION SCALE
is equal to or less than the select-
ed decision height, the DH Located at the bottom center of
annunciator will be displayed. the EADI, displayed in white, with
When first activated, the DH 2 hollow circles on standard ADI
annunciator will flash for 10 sec- display and 4 circles on a com-
onds. The DH symbol is a large posite ADI display and a center
yellow “DH” on a black back- diamond is the expanded lateral
ground enclosed by a yellow box, deviation scale. This scale pro-
located to the right of the pitch vides a reference for the rising
scale and above the horizon line runway symbol with ILS, MLS or
when in normal attitude. Refer to GPS selected. As an expanded
Figure 4.2.2. scale, it represents 1/2 full scale
deviation as displayed on the
PRECISION APPROACH EHSI. When the selected course
MODE FORMAT and aircraft heading differ by
more than 105 degrees, the
The precision approach mode left/right sensitivity is reversed
display is obtained by selecting and a green (onside) or yellow
the ILS MLS or GPS navigation (offside) BC is displayed left of
source. (i.e. using the NAV but- the center diamond to alert the
ton) If an ED 462 or 551A is pilot that back course information
used as the EADI, the full is being displayed. Refer to Fig-

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.9


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.10

EADI Displays

ure 4.2.3 and 4.2.4. alerting the pilot that he has


selected off-side information.
Software version 07 and higher o A second configuration option
will display the expanded localiz- provides for the display of a tradi-
er/MLS/GPS scale as three dots. tional deviation bar in place of the
rising runway. The deviation bar
Note: Warning, some conven - will overlay the lateral deviation
tional ADI expanded ILS and scale. It will not be positioned
MLS displays represent 1/4 of just above the deviation scale as
the full scale displayed by the the rising runway is.
HSI. The EFS 40/50 provides
1/2 the EHSI displayed devia - o A third configuration option
tion to provide better pilot inter - allows the display of the rising
face. runway unless one of the follow-
ing conditions exists, in which
RISING RUNWAY case the deviation bar will be dis-
played.
Three configuration options are
selectable at the time of installa- • No radio altimeter
tion and certification for display of • Radio altimeter is not being
the rising runway symbol. displayed, above 2,500 feet or
not providing computed data
o The first option provides full • Radio altimeter is below
time display of the rising runway minimum altitude, white dashes
only when in the precision displayed
approach mode. The symbolic • Radio altimeter is flagged,
rising runway will be displayed in RED dashes displayed.
the lower center of the display
just above the LOC/MLS/GPS In the event the lateral deviation
approach expanded lateral devia- information becomes invalid or
tion scale. The center line of the failed, the rising runway or D bar
symbolic rising runway repre- and lateral deviation scale are
sents ILS, MLS or GPS approach removed, the lateral deviation
fly to command. If the radio scale is replaced with a RED “X.”
altimeter provides height above
the ground information to the Beginning with software 09, the
E F S 40/50, the rising runway deviation bar and scale are
symbol will start increasing in decluttered when lateral devia-
size at 200 feet and will continue tion information is provided in
to increase in size to 0 feet. ARINC 429 format with a status
When the on-side ILS, MLS or of No Computed Data (NCD).
GPS approach is selected as the The red “X” is still displayed for
primary NAV sensor, the rising invalid or missing data.
runway will be green in color. If
the off-side sensor is selected,
the runway will change to yellow,

4.2.10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.11

EADI Displays

GLIDESLOPE/VERTICAL
NAVIGATION o Declutter GS on Back Course,
allows the vertical deviation scale
When the selected primary NAV to be in view at all times or only
sensor is ILS, MLS or LNAV with when the selected course is within
VNAV selected, a stationary 105 degrees of the aircraft heading.
white vertical deviation scale will o Vertical Scale Side, allows the
appear on the right or left side of vertical deviation scale to be dis-
the EADI display as configured at played on either the right or left
the time of installation and certifi- side of the EADI and EHSI display.
cation. This scale provides a ref- Vertical Pointer Type, allows the
erence for the vertical deviation vertical pointer to be displayed as
pointer. The deviation pointer one of three options:
moves in relation to the scale to o
indicate glide path center with G
respect to aircraft position. S

When the on-side sensor is o


selected for display, the deviation G
pointer is green in color. When S
the off-side sensor is selected for
display, the deviation pointer
changes to yellow alerting the G
o
pilot that he has selected his off-
side nav sensor. S

If the selected sensor is ILS or o Vertical pointer annunciation


MLS, a “GS” (or “GP” for MLS for MLS can be configured as
with software 08 and higher. It "GP" beginning with software 08.
can be either GP or GS after
software 08. The configuration is
selectable.) will be displayed in EADI OFF-SIDE ILS/MLS/GPS
the pointer. “VN” will be annunci- o A configuration option
ated if the selected sensor is an
LNAV with VNAV selected. If the selectable at the time of installa-
selected sensor is “GPS”, a GP tion and certification allows dis-
will be displayed in the vertical play of the off-side ILS/MLS/GPS
pointer during a GPS data on the EADI while the EHSI
approach,(with SW15 or higher is displaying on-side data. All
and configured for varible deviation data and symbology
VNAV). are displayed as typically defined
by the EFS 40/50 operational
Additional configuration options characteristics. On-side informa-
selectable at the time of installa- tion displayed on the EHSI will be
tion and certification: displayed in green and the off-
side information displayed on the
EADI will be displayed in yellow.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.11


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.12

EADI Displays

Back course annunciation on providing the m arker receiver


both the EADI and EHSI is a cal- flashes its output.
culated reference to the course FAST/SLOW OR COLLECTIVE
selected by the on-side EHSI. DISPLAY

The EADI and EHSI deviation flag- An optional display item, selectable
ging will be independent when this at the time of installation and certifi-
configuration option is selected. The cation. If configured, will be dis-
EADI may show a flag while the played on the opposite side of the
EHSI is displaying active data. The EADI from the Glideslope scale. The
flag is tied to the source of deviation scale consists of two vertical white
data. unfilled diamonds and one white
unfilled circle.
N o t e : This mode is not
selectable by the flight crew as Beginning with software 09, a
an “as desired mode of two dot fast/slow scale may be
operation”. EADI deviation configured with the “F” and “S”
information is always displayed representing full scale and the
in yellow. diamonds representing half-
scale.
To enable this feature, the following
conditions must be met: If Fast/Slow is configured, the
scale and pointer will be dis-
• The configuration option played when the airspeed is with-
must be selected in 13 knots of the airspeed bug.
• EHSI must be on-side The scale and pointer may be
• Both sensors used (i.e. ILS, MLS, removed when the airspeed is
or GPS) must be in approach modeI. either 13 knots greater or less
ILS/MLS tuned to an active frequen- than the airspeed bug. The scale
cy or GPS with an active approach provides ±10 knots indication. If
• EADI Down or Composite airspeed is the referenced data,
mode may not be selected AS will be annunciated in the
pointer. If angle of attack is the
MARKER BEACON referenced data, AN will be
ANNUNCIATION annunciated in the pointer.

In the lower left corner, marker If the scale is configured for Collec-
beacon information is displayed tive display, it will operate in the
inside a hexagon shaped box. The same manner as the Fast/Slow.
outer marker, “OM” is displayed in “CO” will be annunciated within the
cyan. The middle marker, “MM” is pointer when the scale provides
displayed in orange. The inner collective information. As the
marker, “IM” is displayed in white. scale factor may vary from air-
All three markers may be displayed craft to aircraft, it is necessary to
simultaneously. Flashing of the refer to the aircraft flight manual
marker display is also possible supplement for those details.

4.2.12 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.13

EADI Displays

Configuration options selectable The pointer is green unless the


at the time of installation and cer- collective option is selected, then
tification: it may be either green or magen-
ta to match the color configured
o Display of no Fast/Slow or Col-
for the flight director command
lective scale.
bars. Three pointer styles are
o Display of a single dot also provided to match the con-
Fast/Slow scale. figured GS pointer style.
o Display of a single dot Collec- If invalid or failed sensor data is
tive scale. received the deviation pointer
o Display of a two dot Fast/Slow and scale are removed and a
scale, beginning with software RED X annunciated.
version 09.
SINGLE DOT CO LLECTIVE TWO DOT
FAST/SLOW FAST/SLOW
(SW 09 and above)

+ Full Scale

or or

- Full Scale

FAST/SLOW AND COLLECTIVE DISPLAYS

MACH DISPLAY RATE OF TURN DISPLAY


o MACH value may be displayed o An optional display item,
on the EADI beginning with soft- selectable at the time of installa-
ware version 10. The MACH tion and certification, if config-
value is displayed in the lower left ured, will be displayed at the bot-
corner of the EADI as a white tom center of the EADI. The rate
three digit number followed by of turn scale is composed of
the letter M. For example: 1.23M three evenly spaced unfilled
Configuring the EFS to display white rectangles. The rate of turn
MACH value will prevent the dis- pointer is an equally sized white
play of a fast/slow or collective filled rectangle balanced atop a
scale. Invalid, missing, or No smaller white filled rectangle.
Computed Data (NCD) for the
MACH value will cause a flag The rate of turn indicator will not
condition (red dashes). be displayed when the composite
reversionary mode is selected for
display.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.13


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.14

EADI Displays

If rate of turn data becomes II annunciation as well as the


invalid, the pointer and scale will excessive deviation limits or the
be removed and replaced with a CAT II annunciation only. These
RED “X”. additional options provide the
flexibility of display where the
o Software release 0702 incor- operator Category II limits
porated configuration items for deviate from the set limit set in
bank angle correction of the yaw the EFS 40/50 configuration
rate gyro. This correction takes selections.
into account the aircraft roll atti-
tude when displaying rate of turn w CATEGORY II OPERATION
information. ANNUNCIATIONS
CATEGORY II Activation of the remote momen-
ANNUNCIATOR tary (Open/Ground after software
07/02) Category II switch by the
Refer to Figure 4.2.7 while pilot will cause a yellow CAT II to
reviewing this section. be displayed on the ADI and HSI
to indicate that Category II
o An optional annunciator pro- annunciations are active. Cate-
vides advisory only information, gory II can be activated at any
selectable at the time of installa- time and in all normal modes of
tion and certification. When con- the EFS.
figured, the symbol generator will
monitor the appropriate on-side In the normal sequence of
and cross-side information and events, a white CAT II will be dis-
alert the crew when Category II played on the ADI and HSI in
requirements or limits are not sat- place of the previous yellow CAT
isfied. II only when certain criteria are
met:
The Category II Annunciator is
functional in either single or dual w DUAL EFS SYSTEM
EFIS installations and provides
different limits for FAR and JAR- The following requirements must
AWO certifications. The function- be met in a four or five tube EFS
ality and requirements are slightly system before the Category II
different between the two sys- annunciator will change to white:
tems, however, the intended
function is the same. 1. Valid ILS or MLS #1 is
selected on Symbol Genera-
o Software release 0702 tor #1.
expanded the configuration 2. Valid ILS #2 is selected on
options for Category II display. Symbol Generator #2.
The additional options allow the 3. Valid ATT #1 is selected on
operator to select at installation Symbol Generator #1.
time whether to display the CAT

4.2.14 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.15

EADI Displays

4. Valid ATT #2 is selected on w SINGLE EFS SYSTEM


Symbol Generator #2.
5. Valid HDG #1 is selected on The following requirements must
Symbol Generator #1. be met in a single HSI and ADI
6. Valid HDG #2 is selected on EFS system before the Category
Symbol Generator #2. II annunciator will change to
7. Pilot and copilot symbolgen- white:
erator are valid.
8. Both crosstalk buses are 1. Valid ILS or MLS #1 is
valid. selected.
9. Copy, composite or ADI- 2. Valid ATT #1 is selected.
down modes are not active. 3. Valid HDG #1 is selected
10. Radio altitude is valid 4. The symbol generator is
and between 2,500 feet and valid.
50 feet. 5. Neither composite nor ADI
11. True heading is not active. down mode is active.
12. Valid pilot flight director. 6. Radio altitude is valid and
13. Pilot’s command bars in view. between 2,500 feet and 50
14. No attitude, heading, local- feet.
izer, glideslope or radio 7. True heading is not active.
altitude miscompare flags. 8 Valid flight director.
15. Front course ILS or MLS 9. Flight director engaged in
approach. localizer and glideslope.
16. Pilot’s flight director (if avail- 10. Command bars in view.
able) engaged in localizer 11. Front course ILS or MLS
and glideslope. approach.
Additional requirements to be A green CAT II will be displayed
added to the above criteria if in place of the white CAT II on
applicable: the ADI and HSI when the above
criteria are met and the radio
• Both pilot and copilot ILS #1 altimeter is between 500 and 100
and #2 frequencies must feet. Beginning with 0702 soft-
match if known and valid. ware, excessive deviation moni-
• Both pilot and copilot MLS #1 toring became a configuration
and #2 channels must match if option and if configured, must
known and valid. also be within limits before the
• Valid copilot flight director if “CAT II” annunciation color
configured. changes to green. Green exces-
• Copilot’s flight director sive deviation arrows (>> <<) will
engaged in localizer and appear on the ADI and HSI local-
glideslope if FD configured. izer and glideslope scales. If the
• Copilot’s command bars in rising runway is configured for
view if FD configured. display, green chevrons will be
displayed within it. Location of
the excessive deviation arrows

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.15


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.16

EADI Displays

on the localizer and glideslope glideslope pointer exceeds the


scales will be displayed accord- limits set by the arrows (>> <<).
ing to the Category II limits.
All yellow excessive deviation
Yellow flashing arrows on the symbols will flash.
localizer scales and yellow flash-
ing chevrons on the rising run- White CAT II will be displayed
way will be displayed if the local- below 100 ft., and no excessive
izer pointer exceeds the limits set deviation symbology will be dis-
by the arrows (>> <<). played.

Yellow flashing arrows on the Yellow CAT II will be displayed


glideslope scales and yellow below 50 ft., and no excessive
flashing GS in the glideslope deviation symbology will be dis-
pointer will be displayed if the played.
w CATEGORY II THRESHOLDS

The following Category II deviation limits can be configured for the


comparison of excessive deviation and for the placement of the devia-

CATEGORY II DEVIATION LIMITS


tion scale arrows.
Note: The FAR deviation limits are intended for guidance only since
the FAR does not specify operational deviation limits for a CAT II
display. FAR localizer limits will change on initial 300 feet crossing
and will remain at new limits. JAR-AWO old limits, as well as no
excessive deviation limits were added as configuration options by
software 0702.
When activated, Category II limit (>> <<) indicators are displayed on
the glideslope and localizer scale, chevrons will also be displayed on
4.2.16 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10
Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:54 AM Page 4.2.17

EADI Displays

the rising runway if it is config- be displayed.


ured for display.
ATTITUDE MONITOR w LOC

Dual channel processing of Atti- Localizer miscompare, a double-


tude inputs provides validation of ended arrow will be displayed
the processed displayed attitude over the localizer deviation point-
information within the symbol er on the EADI and EHSI when
generator. If a failure is detected both SG 1 and SG 2 are tuned to
in the processed information, an ILS/MLS frequency and differ
“ATTITUDE FAIL” is annunciated by more than halfscale deviation.
at the top center of the display
and blue sky and brown ground w GS
information and associated atti-
tude scales are removed. Glideslope miscompare, a dou-
ble-ended arrow will be displayed
Note: There is no monitor func - above the glideslope deviation
tion in any reversionary mode. pointer on the EADI and EHSI
when both SG 1 and SG 2 are
CROSS COMPARATOR tuned to an ILS/MLS frequency
ANNUNCIATORS and differ by more than halfscale.

Refer to Figure 4.2.5 while w ATT


reviewing this section.
Attitude miscompare, a yellow
Provides system comparison double-ended arrow over “ATT”
between like on-side and off-side will be displayed in the top left
sensors. The following list corner of the EADI if ADI pitch 1,
describes the associated symbol- 2, and cross-side (if available)
ogy and sensors: differ by more than 5 degrees or
roll 1, 2, and cross-side (if avail-
w RA able) differ by more than 6
degrees. The miscompare will
Radio altitude miscompare, a yel- also be displayed if the failure
low RA above a double-ended warning flags differ.
arrow displayed just below the
radio altitude readout in the Note: In reversionary modes the
upper right corner. This is dis- EHSI Attitude may be used for
played when SG 1 and SG 2
radio altitude differ by more than
8 feet at between 0 and 99 feet
AGL. The Allowable difference
increases by 8 ft per 100 ft of alti-
tude . If the off-side RA flag is dif-
ferent the miscompare will also

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.17


Section 4.2mp 10/13/10 2:55 AM Page 4.2.18

EADI Displays

comparison if required. comparison if required.

w HDG Note: Beginning with software


10, SG1 to SG2 comparisons
Heading miscompare, a yellow of attitude, heading, and radio
double-ended arrow over “HDG” altitude are not performed if
will be displayed to the left of the valid data is not available on
lubber on the EHSI and right side the cross-talk bus between
center of the EADI if heading 1, symbol generators. Therefore,
2, and cross-side (if available) failure of an SG in installations
differ by more than 6 degrees up with both SG1 and SG2 config -
to 6 degrees of bank and by ured can cause miscompare
more than 20 degrees above 6 annunciations only with soft -
degrees of bank. If bank infor- ware versions before 10.
mation is not available, the mis-
compare will be displayed if
heading differs by more than 20
degrees. The miscompare will
also be displayed if the failure
warning flags differ. Heading
miscompare will be processed in
the EHSI section of the symbol
generator and displayed on the
EADI if the heading t ape is
selected for display. Heading
miscompare will not be per-
formed if sources are not type
matched (all magnetic or all true).

Note: In reversionary modes the


EHSI Attitude may be used for

4.2.18 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.2 POmp 9/9/10 2:09 AM Page 4.2.19

EADI Displays

Figure 4.2.1
TYPICAL EADI 40/50 DISPLAY

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.19


Section 4.2 POmp 9/9/10 2:09 AM Page 4.2.20

EADI Displays

Figure 4.2.2
EADI SYMBOLOGY DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.20


Section 4.2 POmp 9/9/10 2:09 AM Page 4.2.21

EADI Displays

Figure 4.2.3
EADI SYMBOLOGY DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.21


Section 4.2 POmp 9/9/10 2:09 AM Page 4.2.22

EADI Displays

Figure 4.2.4
EADI SYMBOLOGY DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.22


Section 4.2 POmp 9/9/10 2:09 AM Page 4.2.23

EADI Displays

Figure 4.2.5
EADI SYMBOLOGY DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.23


Section 4.2 POmp 9/9/10 2:09 AM Page 4.2.24

EADI Displays

Figure 4.2.6
EADI FAULTS SYMBOLOGY

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.24


Section 4.2 POmp 9/9/10 2:09 AM Page 4.2.25

EADI Displays

Figure 4.2.7
CAT II SYMBOLOGY

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.25


Section 4.2 POmp 9/9/10 2:09 AM Page 4.2.26

EADI Displays

Figure 4.2.8
EXAMPLE EADI ENROUTE DISPLAY
WITH 08 SOFTWARE

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.26


Section 4.2 POmp 9/9/10 2:09 AM Page 4.2.27

EADI Displays

Figure 4.2.9
EXAMPLE EADI APPROACH DISPLAY
WITH 08 SOFTWARE

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.2.27


Section 4.3mp 9/9/10 2:11 AM Page 4.3.1

COMPOSITE Displays

COMPOSITE DISPLAYS
COMPOSITE MODE degrees with heading annuncia-
tion displayed every 30 degrees.
Refer to Figures 4.3.1 and 4.3.2
while reviewing this section. In the event heading data
becomes unavailable or invalid, a
In the event of a display unit or stationary red “HDG” will be dis-
EADI symbol generator section played above and to the right of
failure, the composite mode may the symbolic aircraft.
be selected for display on the
remaining good display unit by SELECTED COURSE
means of an external switch.
The base composite display uti- Toward the bottom of the display,
lizes the standard EADI display left of center is a green alphanu-
for its foundation. To it is added meric readout which provides a
a standard lateral deviation scale, digital display of the selected
selected CRS, selected HDG, course. In addition to the digital
distance information, DME HOLD display, on the heading tape a
annunciation, selected NAV sen- downward pointing arrow pro-
sor and TO/FR information. Cre- vides a visual cue of the selected
ating a composite display in this course with reference to the air-
manner provides the pilot a famil- craft heading.
iar display, which requires mini-
mal transition time when it is If the selected Primary NAV sen-
selected for use. sor is an on-side sensor the digi-
tal readout and pointer is dis-
Note: The following will address played in green. If an on-side
only those areas of the com - LNAV is the selected Primary
posite display which differ from NAV sensor and it is in the
the standard EADI display. approach mode, the readout and
pointer will be green. If the
If the EADI section of the symbol enroute mode is selected, the
generator fails, a full composite readout and pointer are cyan. If
display may be displayed on the an off-side sensor is selected, the
EHSI. If the EHSI section fails, digital readout and pointer will be
only pitch and roll information will displayed in yellow.
be displayed on the EADI.
HEADING BUG SELECT
HEADING TAPE
Toward the bottom of the display,
If not already configured for dis- right of center is an orange (con-
play, a white heading tape will be figuration options for cyan or
fixed along the top of the horizon magenta) alphanumeric readout
line. Index marks appear every 5 which provides a digital display of

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.3.1


Section 4.3mp 9/9/10 2:11 AM Page 4.3.2

COMPOSITE Displays

the selected heading. In addition copilot select VOR 2) a yellow


to the digital display, on the box is placed around the naviga-
heading tape is a hollow orange tion source annunciator on both
heading bug which provides a sides of the cockpit.
visual cue of the selected head-
ing with reference to the aircraft If both sides select their respec-
heading. tive cross-side navigation source
(i.e., pilot selects system 2, copi-
N o t e : As the aircraft heading lot selects system 1) then both
changes, the selected course NAV source annunciators will be
pointer and heading bug will yellow with no yellow box.
follow the heading tape and
may disappear from view. The LATERAL COURSE
heading bug and course point - DEVIATION SCALE
er function the same as they
do in the normal mode of oper - Located at the bottom center of
ation, once set they are fixed the EADI, displayed in white, with
to the heading tape or com - four hollow circles and a center
pass card. diamond is the lateral deviation
scale. The course deviation
NAVIGATION SOURCE scale provides a reference for the
ANNUNCIATION course deviation bar to indicate
the centerline of the selected
A vertical three- or four-letter navigation or localizer or MLS
alphanumeric readout located on course in relation to the center
the left or right side of the dis- diamond.
play, depending on vertical scale
side selection, indicates the navi- The course width displayed in the
gation selected as the primary composite mode is identical to
navigation sensor. that typically shown on the EHSI.
Refer to the table on page 4.1.5.
Green annunciations indicate an
on-side approach NAV system is LATERAL COURSE
being displayed. Yellow indi- DEVIATION BAR
cates the cross-side system has
been selected. Cyan annuncia- The course deviation bar repre-
tions apply to on-side non- sents the centerline of the select-
approach NAV systems. These ed navigation or localizer course.
color codes apply to the NAV
source annunciator, CRS pointer, If invalid or failed primary NAV
deviation bar, CRS, and dis- sensor data is received the
tance. course deviation bar and scale
are removed and a RED X
If both sides select the same annunciated.
navigation source (i.e., pilot and

4.3.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.3mp 9/9/10 2:11 AM Page 4.3.3

COMPOSITE Displays

Beginning with software 09, the DME HOLD


deviation bar and scale are
decluttered when lateral devia- When DME HOLD is selected,
tion information is provided in the DME distance and annuncia-
ARINC 429 format with a status tor color will change to white and
of No Computed Data (NCD). will remain white until the HOLD
The red “X” is still displayed for function is released. The sensor
invalid or missing data. identifier (ADF, VOR, ILS, etc )
shall retain the original assigned
color. The HOLD function is
TO/FROM additionally annunciated by an
orange letter “H” displayed imme-
Displayed left of the center dia- diately to the right of the distance
mond on the lateral deviation information. Ground speed and
scale, a white “TO” or “FR” will time-to-station are not displayed
provide TO/FROM information while DME HOLD is active.
when in non-ILS or non-MLS
modes. Once the DME is placed in
HOLD, its distance will continue
DISTANCE INFORMATION to be displayed and will not be
affected when the primary NAV
An alphanumeric readout, locat- sensor is changed.
ed in the lower left corner, annun-
ciates distance in nautical miles DME HOLD will not function
from the aircraft to the selected when MLS, LNAV or RNAV is the
primary NAV station when in the selected sensor. In this situation
VOR, TACAN, ILS or MLS mode, the associated distance field is
or to the waypoint in the LNAV or always used to display waypoint
RNAV mode. or MLS distance.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.3.3


Section 4.3mp 9/9/10 2:11 AM Page 4.3.4

COMPOSITE Displays

*This page intentionally left blank.

4.3.4 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.3 POmp 9/9/10 2:34 AM Page 4.3.5

COMPOSITE Displays

Figure 4.3.1
COMPOSITE ENROUTE MODE DISPLAY

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.3.5


Section 4.3 POmp 9/9/10 2:34 AM Page 4.3.6

COMPOSITE Displays

Figure 4.3.2
COMPOSITE APPROACH MODE DISPLAY

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.3.6


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.1

MFD Displays

MFD DISPLAYS
Software versions 05 and above weather radar indicator display.
support the Multi Function Dis- Unlike most conventional EFIS
play (MFD) used in three and weather radar displays this dis-
five-tube EFS 40/50 configura- play will not present any non
tions. In traditional EFIS systems weather related information. All
the MFD’s primary purpose was navigation information is
to provide weather radar and/or removed, leaving a clean weath-
LNAV or RNAV moving map er presentation consisting of four
information. In addition to provid- cyan range rings and white radar
ing the traditional display func- annunciations located in the
tionality, the MFD in EFS 40/50 lower left corner.
systems also has the ability to
function as an independent EHSI Weather radar mode, warnings
if the system is configured to pro- and failure annunciations are dis-
vide such functionality. played as they are on the normal
EHSI ARC Weather mode.
In such cases, the information
displayed on the MFD follows the w TRACK LINE
same basic display format as the
EHSI. Therefore this section will A yellow dashed line drawn from
only address those areas of the the center of the symbolic aircraft
MFD that differ from the EHSI. to the compass card or outer
range ring. Activated and slewed
Refer to Figure 4.4.1, 4.4.2 and by pressing one of the TRK but-
4.4.3 while reviewing this section. tons. Pressing the VP button will
activate VP at the location of the
CRS, NOT CRS SELECT Track Line. In the upper left cor-
ner a yellow digital readout dis-
When the MFD course select plays the present position of the
knob is not active, a bar the color track line. Once the track line
of the CRS annunciator will be has remained stationary for 15
placed above it. This will alert the seconds it will be decluttered.
pilot that the MFD CRS knob is
not active and the MFD’s course VERTICAL PROFILE (VP)
annunciator is referenced to the
pilot’s EHSI selected course. w SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT

Example: CRS 135 When the VP mode is selected


for display, the symbolic aircraft
WEATHER ONLY is centered on the left edge of the
display.
o A configuration option avail-
able at the time of installation and Beginning with software version
certification, provides a traditional 09, the Split Screen display is

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.1


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.2

MFD Displays

activated by pressing the VP but- w PLAN-VIEW,


ton while VP is active. Therefore, NORTH-UP MAP
the VP button will provide the fol-
lowing selection sequence: o Beginning with software 07,
Vertical Profile Plan-View is an option selectable
Split Screen at the time of installation. The
Horizontal Scan Only Plan-View North-Up map mode
provides a display in which a
w RANGE RINGS symbolic aircraft shows the actu-
al aircraft’s position relative to the
Four evenly spaced vertical cyan LNAV flight plan route. As the
range rings are displayed during actual aircraft progresses along
VP. At the bottom of each range the flight plan route or deviates
ring, a cyan distance number is from it, the symbolic aircraft like-
displayed annunciating it’s range. wise progresses along or devi-
ates from the flight plan depiction
w ALTITUDE LINE on the indicator. Range is depict-
ed by the dashed white full scale
Three horizontal altitude lines are range ring and dashed light blue
present on the VP display. The half scale range ring. When the
center line is off the nose (bore Plan-View is first entered, the
line) of the symbolic aircraft, rep- symbolic aircraft is positioned in
resenting the actual aircraft’s pre- the center of the display. As the
sent altitude. Equally spaced actual aircraft moves, the sym-
above and below the 0 foot cen- bolic aircraft will move about the
ter line are two altitude lines a display and may move off
certain number feet above and screen. If this occurs, the sym-
below the aircraft. The number bolic aircraft can be brought back
associated with these lines varies onto the screen in any of three
with the selected range to com- ways. One is by pressing the
pensate for the radar beam width enter button. This will reposition
at the various ranges. the symbolic aircraft at the center
of the display. Another method is
w PROFILE ANGLE to use the joystick to change the
lat/long of the center of the
In the upper left corner “PRO- screen (see Joystick operation in
FILE” is displayed annunciating Section 2.4, MFD Operation). A
that the VP mode is selected. third method is to select a greater
Just below it, the present azimuth range scale.
angle being sliced is displayed as
L (left) or R (right) followed by a The Plan-View, always displayed
number. “R6” would represent a as a true north map, aids in flight
VP slice being performed at 6 planning and aircraft position
degrees right of the aircraft nose. awareness. Weather radar, light-
ning and other navigation infor-
mation are not available in Plan-

4.4.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.3

MFD Displays

View mode. eight emergency page inputs


allowing a high degree of free-
To display the Plan-View, an dom in defining and organizing
LNAV with an active valid flight the operation of programmed
plan must be selected as the pri- field units. In addition to being
mary navigation source and be able to program the index and
providing valid magnetic varia- emergency page operation, it is
tion. The current FROM way- also possible to program the col-
point and the next 14 waypoints ors used for the text fields, title
on the flight plan may be dis- lines, and cursor lines for any
played. As defined for the nor- indexed list.
mal NAV Map, the pilot may elect All pages are organized as
to display either the closest twelve lines of 32 characters
navaids or airports along with the each for a total of 384 characters
first five flight plan waypoints. per page. The CP 469A will
store a minimum of 800 checklist
CHECKLIST INTERFACE pages and 400 note pages.
Since the actual storage require-
In software 08 and higher a con- ments vary according to the com-
figuration option available at the plexity of the pages themselves,
time of installation and certifica- the actual storage capacity will
tion, provides Checklist display vary upward from this minimum.
capability on the MFD. Checklist The upper limit for both checklist
functions are controlled via the pages and note pages is fixed at
CP 469A, MFD Control Panel, 1024 each.
buttons and joystick.
w LOADING AND MODIFYING
The user entered checklist data CHECKLIST DATA
is organized in a simple page-ori-
ented format with a pro-
grammable index function which NOTICE
allows quick access to the check- THE USER IS SOLELY
list entries. The index operates RESPONSIBLE FOR
from user entered title descrip- CHECKLIST CONTENT
tions and relative page numbers
which provides maximum flexibili-
ty in organizing and titling the The user may load the CP 469A
index items. It is also possible to with predefined checklist data
create hierarchies of indices generated on an IBM™ compati-
when desired. An additional ble laptop PC using DEU (Data
capability is provided to allow Entry Utility) software on a 3.5
invocation of emergency check- inch disk, KPN 222-00337-xxxx,
lists through discrete signals provided with the CP 469A. This
applied on the rear connector. disk contains a “read me” file with
Any index or checklist page list more detailed information on
can be mapped to any of the generating and modifying check-

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.3


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.4

MFD Displays

list and note pages. The PC The following sections describe


must have DOS version 3.0 or the checklist pages. For a
greater and should have at least description of how the user
512 Kbytes of free RAM. A moves from page to page, refer
cable, KPN 155-02794-0002 is to the CONTROLS section.
required to load the checklist
data from the PC to the CP 469A w ROOT INDEX PAGE
via RS 232. Checklist data in the
CP 469A can also be download- Refer to figure 4.4.6. Upon
ed from the CP 469A to the PC selecting checklist for display, the
where it may be modified and CP 469A will transmit a ‘root’
then re-loaded back into the CP index page to the EFS symbol
469A. User programmable note generator for display. This ‘root’
pages can also be modified with page will include disclaimer text
the use of the PC. that states the user is responsible
for the content and maintenance
w CHECKLIST PAGE of data within the checklist. It will
ORGANIZATION also contain user-supplied text to
describe the checklist, to be used
Available colors are red, green, as a means to identify the
blue, cyan, magenta, yellow, and source/creator/version of the
white. Black is reserved. On all checklist stored in CP 469A
index and checklist pages, the memory. In addition to the title
first two columns of characters and disclaimer lines, the root
are reserved for the cursor and page will have index entries of
checkoff status. A graphical cur- two types: user-defined, and
sor will move from item to item to fixed.
let the user know which line the
cursor is on. In addition, the The fixed entries will include a
color of the line with the cursor NOTES entry which allows
may change. A special character access to the note page sub-tree,
will be displayed in the first and another entry, CLEAR ALL
reserved column to indicate the CHECKLIST ITEMS, which
checked status of a line. A blank allows the user to clear all
will indicate that nothing within checked items in the entire tree.
the sub-tree has been checked These entries will always be pre-
off, or that there is no element to sent on the root tree, and will fol-
be checked off. A star symbol low any user-defined index
will indicate that a list or sub-tree entries. The user is not required
is partially checked off. A check to have any NOTE pages, but the
mark will be displayed when all index entry will always be pre-
checklist items within a sub-tree sent.
have been checked off. These
conditions may also involve a The user-defined index entries
color change on the line. may point to sub-index pages, or
directly to a checklist. The user

4.4.4 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.5

MFD Displays

is free to name these entries, and er list of sub-index pages (or a


to determine their organization. list of checklist pages). The index
Typically, the first entry on the pages form a hierarchy which
root page would be ‘EMERGEN- can be nested arbitrarily deeply
CY PROCEDURES’, but the (subject to memory constraints).
user is free to provide another Each index page consists of a
organization. At least 4 such title line with relative page num-
user-defined index entries will be ber indication, and up to eleven
provided on the root index page. index entry lines. These index
The initial cursor position will entries may span more than a
always be at the first index entry single line, but may not cross
in the root page. The cursor will page boundaries. As with the
be restricted to the six index root index page, the first two
entry lines. character columns are reserved.

The user will be able to specify The user can select the color of
the color of the top title lines, the the title line, and the color of
color of each of the four user- each of the index entry lines. In
assigned index items, the color of addition, the color of the cursor
the cursor line, and the colors line, the color of partially-com-
that each of the user-assigned pleted items, and the color of
index lines change to when all fully-checked items can be speci-
items in the sub-tree have been fied.
checked off or when a portion of
them have been checked off. w CHECKLIST ITEM PAGES
The color of the other lines are
fixed. Refer to figure 4.4.7. At the bot-
tom of the checklist ‘tree’ are the
w SUB INDEX PAGES checklist page lists. These pages
contain individual checklist
Starting with the pointers associ- checkoff items. The items on
ated with the root index page, these pages are either checked
sub-index pages can be created. or unchecked.
These sub-index pages, or sim-
ply index pages, can have entries The contents of checklist pages
which point to either a list of is similar in format to the index
checklist pages, or to another pages, but with some important
index page. Within a given level, differences. The title line consists
the user can chain index pages of title text and a relative page
together. For example, starting at number indication, as with the
one of the index entries on the index pages. The checklist item
root page, the user can create a portion consists of eleven lines of
collection of N index pages trail- text, with the first two character
ing off the entry on the root. columns reserved like the index
Each index entry on the N index pages. A checklist entry can
pages can in turn point to anoth- span more than one line, but

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.5


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.6

MFD Displays

cannot span across checklist pages. They have a title line with
pages. relative page numbering, and 11
lines of text.
The user may specify the color of
the title line, the color of the cur- The user may select the color of
sor line, the color of the checked the note page title line, the color
items, and the color of the of the text on the page, and the
unchecked items. Note that this color of the cursor line.
implies that the unchecked color
of each item cannot be selected w CLEARING CHECKLIST
separately. This helps to avoid ITEMS
color confusion within a checklist
There are two ways to quickly
page. Also, each item is either
return all checklist items to the
checked or unchecked, so no
unchecked state. The first is to
partially-completed checklist remove power from the CP 469A
items apply.
for more than 15 seconds. The
w NOTE PAGES second is to move the cursor
over the CLEAR ALL CHECKED
A separate portion of CP469A ITEMS on the root index page,
memory is reserved for the entry and press the ENTER key. This
of data for reference by the flight will cause a warning page to be
crew, and can be modified sepa- displayed, with instructions on
rately from the checklist page what to do to clear all the
data. The note page portion of checked items.
memory will normally be small,
allowing a quick update from the The ENTER key can be used to
PC to that portion of checklist uncheck individual checklist
memory. items by placing the cursor on a
checked item and then pressing
The DEU utility running on a PC ENT.
is used to create note pages sim-
ilar to the way the checklist is w EMERGENCY PAGE
created. The NOTES entry on ACTIVATION
the root index page points to an
index page listing entries for note The CP 469A provides eight pri-
page lists, or other note page oritized discrete lines for emer-
index pages. Index pages in the gency page use. Using the PC,
note-page sub-tree are formatted the user can bind these active
just like regular index pages, low inputs to specific checklist
except that the indicators for pages, which can be tailored to
completed/partially completed the nature of the emergency dis-
lists will never appear. Only the crete. Any discretes which are
cursor will appear in the first two not bound using the PC will be
character columns. The note ignored by the CP 469A.
pages themselves are similar in
appearance to the checklist Whenever one of these inputs

4.4.6 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.7

MFD Displays

goes low while checklist mode is checklist unit will consider that
active, the checklist unit will auto- emergency ‘handled’, and will
matically display an emergency remove the request for the “C-L
summary page listing all currently EMER” message. However, if a
active emergencies, and the title given emergency discrete is re-
of the list that the emergency is applied after all items associated
bound to. The user may select with that emergency have been
the emergency of choice, and checked off, the checklist unit will
press the ENTER button. Control again notify the user that a given
is then transferred directly to the emergency has re-occurred via
emergency list desired. As soon the emergency summary page.
as the user checks off all items
associated with a given active The CRS/SEL button can be
emergency, the checklist unit will pressed to display the emergen-
again display the emergency cy summary page any time the
summary page, showing that checklist mode is active. A sec-
emergency condition as ond press of the CRS/SEL button
checked-off. This allows the user at this time, returns the previous-
to know when all the checklist ly displayed checklist page.
items associated with an emer- While the emergency summary
gency have been checked off, page is displayed, the 1-2 key
and allows an easy way to pro- can be used to display a list of all
ceed to the next active emergen- the emergencies that were
cy, if one exists. mapped to an emergency dis-
crete.
If an emergency discrete activa-
w CHECKLIST CONTROLS
tion is detected by the CP 469A
while the checklist mode is not Checklist: CHKLIST
active, a yellow “C-L EMER” Selecting the CHKLIST button
message will be displayed on the activates and deactivates the
MFD. When the user presses checklist function and causes the
the CHK LIST button to activate information to be displayed on
the checklist mode, the checklist the MFD. The checklist will pro-
unit will display the emergency vide approximately 800 pages of
summary page as described normal, abnormal, and emergen-
above. This provides the cy data.
pilot/copilot with an easy means
to determine the source of the Joystick
emergency discrete (the name of The joystick can be moved side
the checklist it is tied to will to side, up and down, and to the
appear on the emergency sum- 45 degree points. The 45 degree
mary page) and to proceed to points will be ignored in checklist
check off the items associated mode.
with that emergency. Once all
the items associated with a given Joystick position data will be
emergency are checked off, the transmitted continually to the

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.7


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.8

MFD Displays

EFS MFD for use in MAP pro- the top of the preceding pages.
cessing, and will be used by the Paging is within a single level,
CP 469A processor to enable and wrapping from the first to the
movement through checklist last page within a level will be
pages (when the CP 469A is in supported. Holding the joystick
checklist mode). left continuously will cause the
A downward push on the joystick cursor to slew through the pages
will cause the cursor to move in reverse.
down one line or item in the
checklist. The line down opera- Enter : ENT
tion advances from one
The state of the ENT key is con-
index/item page to the next, and tinually transmitted to the EFS for
wraps within one level. Holding
MAP processing use, and is also
the joystick down continuously
used by the CP 469A for check-
will cause the cursor to slew
list purposes.
down.
An upward push on the joystick When in the checklist mode, the
will cause the cursor to move up enter button will behave different-
one line or item in the checklist. ly depending on where in the
The line up operation advances checklist the cursor is located.
from one index/item page to the The general behavior of the
previous page, and wraps within ENTER key is to enable the pilot
one level of pages. Holding the to check off everything in the
joystick up continuously will checklist by using the ENTER
cause the cursor to slew up. key alone. In the checklist pages,
pressing enter on an unchecked
A rightward push on the joystick item will cause the cursor to
will cause the cursor to go to the check off that item and proceed
top of the next page. The next to the next unchecked item in the
page operation applies only with- list. If no unchecked items exist
in a single level, and wraps to the between the cursor position and
first page within a level. For the end of the list of item pages,
example, a rightward push while the cursor is placed on the first
on the last page of a list of check- unchecked index entry of the par-
list pages will move the cursor to ent index list. If no unchecked
the top of the first page in the list. index entries exist at that level,
Holding the joystick right continu- the search continues up the
ously will cause the cursor to checklist tree until an uncomplet-
slew forward through the pages. ed index entry is found, or until
the cursor reaches the root index
An leftward push on the joystick page. If the item is checked off
will cause the cursor to proceed and the enter button is
to the top of the currently selected depressed, the line will be
page, and subsequent leftward unchecked and the cursor will
pushes will move the cursor to remain at the line just
unchecked.
4.4.8 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10
Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.9

MFD Displays

When on an index page, press- Up Arrow


ing the enter button will cause the
When in checklist mode, an up-
cursor to move to the next
arrow (range-up) push will serve
unchecked item or index entry it
to move the cursor up the ‘check-
finds. If the entry is not fully com- list tree’. That is, if the cursor is
pleted, the cursor is moved to the
on a checklist page, a range up
next lower level, and parked on
will move the cursor to the index
the first uncompleted item/entry
page entry used to access that
on that level. If the index entry
list. When the cursor is posi-
that the cursor is on is already
tioned over an index page entry,
fully checked-off, the cursor first the cursor will move to the index
searches the current list of index
page and entry from which the
pages for an unchecked index
current index entry is accessed.
entry, and then searches all the
A range up push on the root
layers of index pages upward,
index page has no effect, since
toward the root index page,
no higher level exists to go to.
always looking for an incomplete
checklist. If all items are checked Down Arrow
off, the cursor moves to the top of
the root index page. When in checklist mode, the
down arrow (range down) will
On the root index page when the move the cursor down the
cursor is on the “CLEAR ALL ‘checklist tree’ by moving the cur-
CHECKED ITEMS”, pressing the sor into the branch accessed
enter button will cause a warning through any index page entry. A
page to come up asking for verifi- range down push while the cur-
cation that the pilot truly wants to sor is on a item page has no
clear all checked items. An addi- effect, since there are no ‘lower’
tional push on this screen will levels to go to.
cause all checked items to be
cleared. 1-2
HSI When checklist mode is active,
the 1-2 key normally will not be
The HSI button will not function active. However, if the active
while the checklist is active. emergency summary page is cur-
ARC rently displayed, the 1-2 key will
cause the checklist unit to display
The ARC button will not function an informational page listing all
while the checklist is active. currently ‘bound’ emergency dis-
cretes. This page lists all eight
NAV emergency discretes, and the
title of the checklist page that
The NAV button will not function
each was bound to using the
while the checklist is active.
DEU utility software.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.9


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.10

MFD Displays

469A can be implemented with


RMI 1 remotely mounted switches
wired to the rear connector.
The RMI 1 button will not function
while the checklist is active. • Up Arrow : EXT UP
• Down Arrow : EXT DWN
RMI 2
• Enter : EXT ENTER
The RMI 2 button will not function • Joystick
while the checklist is active.
FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS
CRS (NOT) SEL
There will be two possible control
When in checklist mode, the panel faults that will get dis-
CRS(NOT) button will cause the played on the MFD display if the
checklist unit to display the list of control panel fails. One fault is
active emergencies. A second the normal red CP fault caused
press returns the previous dis- by a mode line failure. The sec-
play. ond fault is a red CCP fault
caused by a failure in the check-
TST REF list control panel processing.
When in checklist mode, the TST The faults to be detected by the
REF button will cause the check- CP 469A to cause this annuncia-
list unit to display a ‘canned’ help tor include the following:
page. This help page can be
1. CPU test failure
used by the pilot/copilot to remind 2. ROM test failure
them what button combinations
3. RAM test failure
are used in checklist mode. This
4. Stuck joystick or control
CHECKLIST KEYSTROKE OPERATIONS panel key
JOYSTICK UP: UP ONE ITEM
5. Invalid data in checklist/notes
JOYSTICK DOWN: DOWN ONE ITEM EPROM (checksum failure).
JOYSTICK LEFT: PREVIOUS PAGE This fault condition applies
JOYSTICK RIGHT: NEXT PAGE only if the EPROM chip is
RANGE UP: UP ONE LEVEL NOT completely erased. That
RANGE DOWN: DOWN ONE LEVEL is, if the checksum test on
ENTER: CHECK-OFF ITEM
CRS/SEL: ACTIVE EMERGENCY EPROM chip data fails
PRESS TST/REF TO EXIT HELP because the chip is erased, a
CCP fault should NOT be
raised. This is because the
help page will appear as follows:
CRS Knob CP469A will come from the
factory with the EPROM chips
The CRS knob will not function erased, and it is undesirable
while the checklist is active.
for the product to show a fault
REMOTELY MOUNTED straight out of the box. Only if
SWITCHES at least one of the bits in the
EPROM are programmed,
The following functions of the CP and the EPROM checksum
test fails will a CCP fault be
4.4.10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10
Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.11

MFD Displays

generated. within the selected altitude limits


TCAS INTERFACE will also be displayed when pos-
sible. The EFS 40/50 will display
With software 08 and higher a up to 20 TCAS intruders on the
configuration option available at MFD.
the time of installation and certifi-
cation, provides a TCAS ONLY w TCAS ONLY SELECTION
traffic display on the MFD. A
“TRAFFIC” message is provided With EFS software 08 and later,
if TCAS is configured for the pilot a dedicated TCAS select push
and co-pilot EHSI displays during button on the CP 469A MFD
an active TA or RA, but intruder Control Panel labeled “TCAS
traffic will not be shown on these ONLY” will provide 360° TCAS
displays, only the MFD. ONLY (range = 5 nm) on the
MFD with a single selection. This
Range control will be retained by momentary switch will altermate-
the CP 469A MFD control panel. ly select TCAS ONLY and last
Above/norm/below and actual/ display mode. The last display
relative altitude selections will be mode will be restored exactly,
made on the TCAS control panel. including previous range and
map format.
Resolution advisory (RA) infor-
mation such as a climb arrow will TCAS and checklist are mutually
not be shown on the MFD. RA exclusive modes that will cancel
traffic will be displayed with each other such that only the
TCAS II, but not TCAS I. most recently selected will be
active.
Whenever a normal operating
mode that does not display Default conditions at selection:
TCAS traffic information is select- 360° format
ed on an MFD display , “TRAF- 5 NM range
FIC” will be annunciated to indi- All intruders displayed
cate that a TA or RA is in (20 max.)
progress. This annunciation will Operation while selected:
remain on non-TCAS displays as Ranges available: 2, 5, 10, 20,
long as at least one TA or RA is 40 NM
active. 360° format only
TST/REF, NAV, RMI 1, RMI 2,
All RA, TA, and PROXIMATE ENT, JOYSTICK and 1/2
TRAFFIC will be displayed on the buttons are inactive
MFD when TCAS is configured De-selection:
and TCAS ONLY is selected, The dedicated TCAS ONLY
regardless of display format and select always returns to the last
altitude limits. OTHER TRAFFIC

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.11


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.12

MFD Displays

display mode. when appropriate, a vertical


w TCAS DISPLAY FORMAT speed arrow. The data tag and
arrow will be the same color as
TCAS ONLY display will be 360° the intruder symbol that they are
format and normally contain the associated with. The intruder
following elements: symbol, data tag, and vertical
speed arrow will appear the
* Small cyan symbolic aircraft same size regardless of range
symbol located in the center of selection.
the 360° TCAS ONLY display.
* Two NM range ring consisting Intruder Symbols
of cyan dots positioned every
30 degrees to represent the 12
clock positions. Presented on
2NM (after software 10), 5 NM
and 10 NM ranges only.
* Full range ring consisting of
cyan radial tick marks pos- Note: RA traffic is not provided
itioned every 30 degrees to with TCAS I.
represent the 12 clock pos-
itions plus intervening cyan Traffic generating a Resolution
dots every 10 degrees. Advisory (RA) will be displayed
* Map type half range ring (white as solid red squares. Traffic gen-
dashes) without range annunc- erating a Traffic Advisory (TA)
iation on 20 NM and 40 NM will be displayed as solid yellow
ranges. circles. Proximate traffic will be
* “TCAS” annunciation in vertical displayed as solid white dia-
field in place of nav source. monds. All other, no threat traffic
* TCAS mode annunciation. will be displayed as hollow (out-
* TCAS range annunciation. line only) white diamonds.
* Up to two no-bearing intruder Intruder symbols are centered on
messages. the actual intruder location.
* Above/norm/below annuncia-
tion. Vertical Speed Arrow
* Actual intruder altitude and
The vertical speed arrow will be
(FLXXX) annunciation when
appropriate. positioned immediately to the
right of the intruder symbol when
* TCAS traffic symbols (intruder,
the intruder vertical trend is climb
data tag, and vertical speed
arrow). or descend as reported by the
TCAS processor. The arrow will
w TCAS TRAFFIC SYMBOLO - point up for climbing traffic and
GY down for descending traffic.

Each intruder symbol will be Data Tag


accompanied by a data tag and, The data tag will normally consist

4.4.12 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.13

MFD Displays

of a + or - followed by two digits display area will be visible.


of altitude difference (relative alti-
tude) in hundreds of feet w TCAS DISPLAY
between the intruder and own ANNUNCIATIONS
aircraft. (+ = intruder above own
aircraft) During selection of actu- Traffic
al altitude, and with a valid
During an active RA or TA, a
source of own altitude provided
“TRAFFIC” message will be
by the TCAS processor, the data
annunciated in large text on all
tag will consist of three digits rep-
EFS displays configured for dis-
resenting hundreds of feet above
playing TCAS traffic but with
MSL. Actual altitudes below sea TCAS de-selected. This annun-
level will be displayed as two dig-
ciation will be provided for all nor-
its preceded by a minus sign.
mal operating modes, but not
The data tag will be centered on
while maintenance or configura-
the intruder symbol and posi-
tion pages are displayed.
tioned above it when the intruder
“TRAFFIC” will be red during an
is above own aircraft. The data active RA and yellow during an
tag will be positioned below the
active TA (an RA has priority
intruder symbol when the intruder
over a TA). This annunciation
is below own aircraft. The rela-
will not be made while TCAS is
tive altitude data tag for intruders
selected for display. Beginning
at the same altitude as own air-
with software 0802, the "TRAF-
craft will consist of “00” without a FIC" message will be replaced by
+ or - sign and be positioned to
a "NO TCAS " message for 15
indicate the intruder’s most
seconds following a TCAS failure
recent altitude deviation from
or a change of TCAS mode to
own aircraft. When no altitude
Standby.
trend information is available, the
“00” is positioned below the traffic N o t e : A remote annunciator
symbol.
may be included in some
Off-Scale Traffic
installations to provide full time
TCAS operational status.
RA and TA traffic that is located
beyond the selected range of a TCAS
TCAS display will be shown as
one half of the appropriate intrud- TCAS ONLY format will include a
cyan “TCAS” displayed in the
er symbol located on the outer
vertical field where the selected
edge of the displayed area at the
proper bearing. A data tag
and/or vertical speed arrow asso-
ciated with this intruder will retain
its normal position relative to the
intruder symbol and only that
portion (if any) within the normal

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.13


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.14

MFD Displays

navigation source is normally displayed in other modes.


TCAS Status
TCAS mode, range, above/norm/below selection, and actual altitude
(FL) selection will be presented in the bottom right corner of the dis-
play normally used for the RMI 2 pointer annunciations. FLxxx and

TCAS STATUS ANNUNCIATION


ABV/BLW are both provided in
the same five character field
when specific conditions are sat- TD FAIL - Indicates that the
isfied as shown in the following capability of the EFS to prop -
table. erly display TCAS traffic is
TCAS Mode suspect.

TEST - Indicates that the TCAS TCAS FAIL - Indicates that the
processor is performing sys - TCAS processor (or a TCAS
tem test. antenna) has failed.

4.4.14 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.15

MFD Displays

NO TCAS - Indicates that a No-Bearing Traffic


TCAS system component
(other than TCAS processor During any TCAS display, up to
and TCAS antenna) has failed. two no-bearing traffic messages
TCAS STBY - Indicates that may be required. The format for
TCAS has been intentionally these messages is “TA 5.7NM/-
placed in standby mode. 06↑” or “RA 0.8NM/+01↓” where
-06 and +01 are the relative alti-
TA - Indicates that TA ONLY tudes of the intruder aircraft. Rel-
mode has been entered by the ative altitudes (including the + or
TCAS processor. - sign) will be replaced by a 3
digit actual altitude in hundreds of
When displayed, the annuncia - feet whenever the conditions for
tion color will be yellow if any display of actual altitude have
intruder is a Traffic Advisory been satisfied. RA messages
(TA). The color will be cyan will be red and TA messages will
when there are no intruders be yellow. The vertical speed
classified as a TA. arrow, when climb or descend is
indicated, will be displayed imme-
TA/RA - Indicates normal opera - diately to the right of the altitude
tion for TCAS II. This annunci - digits.
ation will not appear when
TCAS I is installed. FLXXX and FL

Range A white FLXXX is annunciated


only when actual intruder altitude
Range is annunciated in cyan (FL) is being displayed. This
without an alpha prefix immedi- annunciation will be absent when
ately to the left of the TCAS sta- relative intruder altitudes are dis-
tus information. The ranges played. XXX will be own aircraft
available are 2, 5, 10, 20, 40. actual altitude in hundreds of feet
as provided. This annunciation
Above/Norm/Below will be “FL---” (dashes added by
software version 10) in yellow
All TCAS displays will annunciate when actual altitude has been
a cyan “ABV” or “BLW” when selected but a valid source of
above or below respectively are own aircraft actual altitude is not
selected on the TCAS controller. provided by the TCAS processor.
Neither annunciation is provided Negative actual altitudes will be
when normal is selected. This displayed as two digits preceded
same three character field is also by a negative sign. (FL-XX)
used to present own aircraft alti-
tude when actual altitude (FL) is
selected. The FL annunciation
has priority over ABV and BLW.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.15


Section 4.4mp 9/9/10 3:48 AM Page 4.4.16

MFD Displays

mode will be restored.


Note: At the time of this publica -
tion, TCAS displays in con - w EGPWS DISPLAY FORMAT
junction with other display for -
mats has not been certified. Terrain display will show 180° of
EGPWS INTERFACE scan angle and normally contain
the following elements:
o Beginning with software 14, a
configuration option available at * Mode/status annunciation.
the time of installation and certifi- * Range annunciation.
cation provides an EGPWS ter-
rain display on the MFD. w EGPWS MODE/STATUS
EGPWS mode will be presented
w EGPWS SELECTION on three lines in the bottom right
(or left, as configured) corner of
Beginning with EFS software 14, the display.
a dedicated Terrain Select push
button determines whether The first line will be a white
Weather or Terrain data is shown TERR annunciation. Lines two
on the MFD. and three each may be a six
character text message annuciat-
When EGPWS is manually ing the current EGPWS
selected via the Terrain Select mode/status.
pushbutton, the terrain data will
be displayed in the currently TEST - EGPWS processor is
selected HSI/ARC format. performing system test.
When EGPWS is automatically TERR FAIL - EGPWS processor
(pop-up) selected, the display will is no longer communicating
change to: with the EFIS system.
ARC format, 10 NM range
TERR RANGE EXCEED - A
Automatic selection (pop-up) is range greater than 320 nm is
initiated by the EGPWS detecting selected.
a terrain Warning or Caution con-
TERR RANGE FAULT - Indi -
dition and setting a pop-up dis- cates a mismatch of the speci -
crete. Pop-up is monitored only fied range between the EFIS
when the terrain is selected. CP and the 453 data.
Upon deselection of Terrain EGPWS PEAKS ELEVATION -
mode, weather data will be redis- Maximum peaks elevation dis -
played in the current HSI/ARC played over minimum peaks
format. The previous scan angle elevation.
for weather will be restored. If VP
or SS was selected prior to ter- w EGPWS RANGE
rain selection, VP or SS display
Range control will be retained by

4.4.16 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 4.4 POmp 9/9/10 3:49 AM Page 4.4.17

MFD Displays

Figure 4.4.1
MFD ARC COMPASS + WX SYMBOL DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.17


Section 4.4 POmp 9/9/10 3:49 AM Page 4.4.18

MFD Displays

Figure 4.4.2
MFD WEATHER ONLY DISPLAY

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.18


Section 4.4 POmp 9/9/10 3:49 AM Page 4.4.19

MFD Displays

Figure 4.4.3
MFD VP DISPLAY

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.19


Section 4.4 POmp 9/9/10 3:49 AM Page 4.4.20

MFD Displays

Figure 4.4.4
MFD SPLIT SCREEN DISPLAY
(NOTE: SW 09 and later)

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.20


Section 4.4 POmp 9/9/10 3:49 AM Page 4.4.21

MFD Displays

Figure 4.4.5
MFD PLAN VIEW DISPLAY

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.21


Section 4.4 POmp 9/9/10 3:49 AM Page 4.4.22

MFD Displays

Figure 4.4.6
TCAS ONLY DISPLAY

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.22


Section 4.4 POmp 9/9/10 3:49 AM Page 4.4.23

MFD Displays

Figure 4.4.6a
EGPWS DISPLAY

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.22a


Section 4.4 POmp 9/9/10 3:49 AM Page 4.4.23

MFD Displays

Figure 4.4.7
MFD CHECKLIST ROOT INDEX PAGE DEFINITION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.23


Section 4.4 POmp 9/9/10 3:49 AM Page 4.4.24

MFD Displays

Figure 4.4.8
MFD CHECKLIST SAMPLE PAGE

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 4.4.24


Section 5mp 9/9/10 3:52 AM Page 5.1

Operating Instructions

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Consult Aircraft Flight Manual system is operating properly the
Supplement for specific proce- SELF TEST PASS message will
dures and limitations in opera- be annunciated. If a malfunction
tion. exists, SELF TEST FAIL will be
annunciated and the system
PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES should be serviced. Refer to fig-
ure 5.1 and 5.2, Self Test annun-
w START UP ciation. Additionally, the pilot
should ensure that the compass
At engine start, power should not scale is white, which indicates
be applied to the EHI 40/50 sys- that all three colors are opera-
tem, low voltage may turn the tional in the display unit.
EFS 40/50 system off momentar-
ily, and transient voltages may Note: Performing the EFS 40/50
induce premature failures. With Self Test is not required at
engines operating, turn on gyros anytime. If a failure was to
and flight control systems, turn occur or exist, the small RED
on avionics master switches to SG in a red box would be dis -
include the EFS 40/50 master, played. This test is intended to
and turn on NAV systems to familiarize the pilot with the
remove the EHSI flags. various flagging methodology
used and a quick check for
When power is initially applied to proper color presentation.
the EFS 40/50 system, various
flags maybe annunciated on the The EADI self test page will auto-
display, representing systems not matically revert to a normal EADI
yet operational. display. After software 07, the
EHSI will also automatically
w SELF TEST revert to normal operation from
the self-test page after five sec-
Adjust BRT control on the onds.
EFS 40/50 CP 467, CP 468 or
E D 461 and CP 470 for the w PUSH BUTTON TEST
desired brightness.
Check each push button function
After a short warm-up time, press on the EFS 40/50 control panel.
and hold the TST/REF button for Push button operation should be
three seconds to display the as described in 2.1 EHSI Opera-
SELF TEST. A SELF TEST tion, 2.2 EADI Operation, 2.3
PASS or SELF TEST FAIL mes- RADAR Operation.and 2.4 MFD
sage will be annunciated. If the Operation.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 5.1


Section 5mp 9/9/10 3:52 AM Page 5.2

Operating Instructions

PRE-TAKEOFF On the ED 461 with built in con-


PROCEDURES trols, the center push buttons on
the knobs may be used to 1)
After the system test has been rapidly acquire the DIRECT TO
completed, select the desired Pri- course to the station (DIR push
mary NAV sensor with the NAV button), or 2) center the heading
source select push button. Set bug under the lubber line (SYNC
the desired course and heading, push button).
and check that the appropriate On the CP 468 separate control
display is present on the indica- panel, the heading and course
tor. Set the desired NAV frequen- knobs may be used to 1) rapidly
cies for the departure phase of acquire the DIRECT TO course
the flight. Then press the appro- to the station (pull DIR knob), or
priate push buttons (HSI, ARC, 2) center the heading bug under
BEARING #1, BEARING #2, the lubber line (pull SYNC knob).
etc.) on the EFS 40/50 control
panel for the desired display pre- Use the #1 and #2 BEARING
sentation. POINTER SELECT push buttons
to select the sensor desired by
IN-FLIGHT OPERATION pressing the push button until the
desired source is annunciated.
Select the desired type of NAV These push buttons are also
sensor for the primary NAV dis- used to display inde pendent
play by pressing the NAV push DME information without a bear-
button until the desired source is ing pointer.
annunciated.
w ADF
Select NAV system #1 (left) or #2
(right) by pressing the 1-2 push After selecting ADF mode and
button. tuning ADF #1 receiver to the
desired NDB, set Bearing pointer
Select HSI or ARC display by #1 to ADF. Using CRS control,
pressing either the HSI or the select desired course TO or
ARC push button. FROM the NDB. The course
deviation bar on the EHSI now
Select the display mode (map provides left-right guidance in fly-
and/or weather radar) by sequen- ing the selected course just as it
tial presses of the HSI or ARC would in flying a VOR course.
push button. This eliminates the mental calcu-
lations required while tracking an
Use HEADING SELECT (SYNC NDB course in the conventional
or HDG) or COURSE SELECT manner. NDB station passage is
(DIR or CRS) knobs to select the indicated by the TO-FROM indi-
desired heading or course. cator and Bearing pointer rever-
sal.

5.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 5mp 9/9/10 3:52 AM Page 5.3

Operating Instructions

Note: ADF D-Bar presentation w VNAV


may not be available if the
ADF does not provide a suit - VNAV operation greatly depends
able flag output. on the type of VNAV installed. It
is therefore very important to
w LNAV (RNAV) refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual
Supplement and VNAV operation
After selecting LNAV, NAV manual for additional information.
( K N S 81 programmed as an
RNAV), GPS or RNAV mode and APPROACH PROCEDURES
the desired waypoint, set Bearing
Pointer #1 to the desired #1 w ILS APPROACH
bearing source. Using CRS
knob, select desired course TO On the CP 467, CP 468 or
or FROM the waypoint (for the ED 461, select VOR as the Pri-
on-side LNAV only). The course mary NAV sensor with the NAV
deviation bar on the EHSI now push button. Then tune the
provides guidance in flying the appropriate ILS frequency. Note
selected course. Waypoint pas- on the EHSI that when an ILS
sage is indicated by the TO- frequency is selected LOC
FROM indicator and waypoint replaces the VOR annunciation,
BEARING pointer reversal. the glideslope scale is displayed,
and as the glide slope and local-
N o t e : Wind vector and speed izer scales appear on the EADI
information is presented if sup - the sky/ ground raster is reduced
plied by ancillary equipment in size to provide a high-contrast
and only if the system was background for them. Once an
configured to display the infor - ILS frequency is selected, the
mation during installation. Bearing pointer and TO-FROM
indicator associated with that
Once the external LNAV system NAV disappears.
transmits to the EFS 40/50 that it
is in an enroute mode, the EHSI When DME Hold is selected on
and system sensitivity is set at the DME control panel, DME dis-
5NM left or right of course for full- tance is displayed in white.
scale CDI deflection. Groundspeed or Time-To-Station
is replaced with the held VOR
Note: Depending on the type of frequency followed by an orange
LNAV installed, the Lateral H for HOLD. (DME groundspeed
Deviation Scale may be differ - and VOR frequency may not be
ent and may support only DTK. displayed in all installations.)

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 5.3


Section 5mp 9/9/10 3:52 AM Page 5.4

Operating Instructions

w BACK COURSE APPROACH w LNAV (RNAV) APPROACH

An option may be selected at the After selecting LNAV mode and


time of installation and certifica- the desired waypoint, set Bearing
tion to automatically declutter GS Pointer #1 to the desired #1
information when the aircraft bearing sensor. If the installed
heading is greater than + or - 105 LNAV supports selected course
degrees from selected ILS from the EFS 40/50, use the
course. EHSI NAV MAP CDI CRS knob to select desired
sensing is reversed and “BC” is course TO or FROM the way-
annunciated below the deviation point. The course deviation bar
scale. EADI CDI sensing is on the EHSI now provides guid-
reversed and “BC” is displayed to ance in flying the selected
the left of the center diamond. course. Waypoint passage is
indicated by the TO-FROM indi-
Not all installations will declutter cator and waypoint Bearing
the glideslope scale. This is a pointer reversal.
display configuration option
selected at the time of installa- Once the external LNAV system
tion. transmits to the EFS 40/50 that it
is in an approach mode, the cyan
w ADF APPROACH colors turn green on the EHSI
and system sensitivity increases
After selecting ADF mode and to 1.25 NM or ± 0.3 NM for GPS
tuning ADF #1 receiver to the left or right for full-scale CDI
desired NDB, set Bearing pointer deflection. The sensitivity
#1 to ADF. Using CRS control, becomes variable when doing a
select desired course TO or G P S approach with variable
FROM the NDB. The course VNAV enabled for SW 15 and
deviation bar on the EHSI now later. Cross-side annunciation
provides left-right guidance in fly- remains yellow, but the increased
ing the selected course as it sensitivity is implemented if the
would in flying a VOR course. cross-side LNAV is in Approach
This eliminates the mental calcu- Approved mode.
lations required while tracking an
NDB course in the conventional Note: Depending on the type of
manner. NDB station passage is LNAV installed, the Lateral
indicated by the TO-FROM indi- Deviation Scale may be differ -
cator and Bearing pointer rever- ent and may only support DTK.
sal.

N o t e : DF D-Bar presentation w VNAV GPS PRECISION


may not be available if the APPROACH
ADF does not provide a suit -
able flag output. When the LNAV is capable of
displaying precision approaches

5.4 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 5mp 9/9/10 3:52 AM Page 5.5

Operating Instructions

(such as WAAS), the vertical For information on EFS 4 0 / 5 0


deviation scale will appear pro- system operating limitations
vided valid data is being received please refer to the approved
from the LNAV and a proper Flight Manual Supplement for the
approach procedure is active. particular aircraft in question, if
Refer to the navigator pilot's one is provided.
guide for full scale vertical deflec-
tion operation. EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
w VOR APPROACH
For information on EFS 4 0 / 5 0
After selecting NAV mode and system emergency procedures
tuning the VOR receiver to the please refer to the approved
desired frequency, set Bearing Flight Manual Supplement for the
Pointer #1 to VOR #1. Using particular aircraft in question, if
CRS control, select desired one is provided.
course TO or FROM the VOR
station. The course deviation bar
on the EHSI now provides guid-
ance in flying the selected
course. VOR passage is indicat-
ed by the TO-FROM indicator
and Bearing pointer reversal.

Note that EHSI NAV information


is similar to ADF except that
VOR is displayed rather than
ADF.

w DECISION HEIGHT
SELECTION

Pull the DH set knob on the


CP 467 or CP 470 to activate the
DH set display on the EADI.
Adjust the DH set knob to select
the desired decision height for
the particular approach. Push
the DH set knob in, the select DH
will be decluttered until the radar
altimeter becomes valid at or
below 2500 feet.

LIMITATIONS

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 5.5


Section 5mp 9/9/10 3:52 AM Page 5.6

Operating Instructions

*This page intentionally left blank.

5.6 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 5 POmp 9/9/10 3:54 AM Page 5.7

Operating Instructions

Figure 5.1
EHSI SELF TEST

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 5.7


Section 5 POmp 9/9/10 3:54 AM Page 5.8

Operating Instructions

Figure 5.2
EADI SELF TEST

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 5.8


Section 6mp 9/9/10 3:57 AM Page 6.1

Fault Annunciations

FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS

GENERAL
EXTERNAL SYSTEM FAILURES
w HEADING EFS 40/50 system is inhibited.
Refer to Figure 6.2 and 6.4.
Once a heading failure is detect-
ed, the EHSI lubber line and w ATTITUDE
course pointer head and tail are
Once an Attitude failure is detect-
removed. The lubber line is
ed, the pitch scale, roll scale, roll
replaced by a RED box with a
index pointer, horizon line, head-
RED HDG inside it. The course
ing tape, blue sky and brown
deviation scale is frozen horizon-
ground are removed from the dis-
tally to perform the function of a
play. A RED box with a red
conventional CDI. Selected
“ATTITUDE FAIL” inside it is dis-
course reference is provided by
played on a black background in
the alphanumeric CRS readout in
the upper center of the display.
the upper left corner. If heading
was configured for display on w FLIGHT DIRECTOR
EADI horizon line, a RED box
with a RED HDG inside it will be Once a Flight Director failure is
displayed upper left of center. detected a RED box with a red
“FD” inside it will be displayed on
During a heading failure the auto- the upper right side of the EADI.
matic Back Course function nor- Refer to Figure 6.4, EADI Faults.
mally performed by the

EFS 40/50 SYSTEM FAILURES


w DU—DISPLAY UNIT LOSS w SG—SYMBOL GENERATOR
OF COOLING LOSS OF COOLING
A yellow DU enclosed in a yellow A yellow SG enclosed by a yel-
box is annunciated at the bottom low box is annunciated at the
left center of the EHSI or bottom bottom right center of the EHSI
left of the EADI when insufficient and bottom left of the EADI if
airflow is detected in the Display insufficient airflow is detected in
Unit. Once annunciated, the the Symbol Generator. Once
faulty Display Unit will continue to annunciated, the Symbol Gener-
operate for at least 30 minutes if ator will continue to operate for at
the rated ambient temperature is least 30 minutes if the rated
not exceeded. To extend the ambient temperature is not
operating time, reduce display exceeded. To extend the operat-
information and brightness to a ing time, reduce display informa-
minimum. Refer to Figure 6.1 tion and brightness to a mini-
and 6.4. mum. Refer to Figure 6.1 and
6.4.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 6.1


Section 6mp 9/9/10 3:57 AM Page 6.2

Fault Annunciations

w CP—CONTROL PANEL undesirable for the product to


(CP 467, CP 468, ED 461 OR show a fault straight out of the
CP 470) box. Only if at least one of the
bits in the EPROM are pro-
A RED CP enclosed by a RED grammed, and the EPROM
box is annunciated left center of checksum test fails will a CCP
the EHSI and lower left of the fault be generated.
EADI if a control panel switch
becomes stuck for greater than w HEADING SELECT “BUG”
10 seconds. If a switch fails the
display should maintain all cur- A RED X will be drawn through
rently selected conditions. If the the heading bug if there is a
switch should become functional heading select knob failure on
the fault annunciation will be the EFS 40/50 control panel.
removed and normal operation Refer to Figure 6.2.
will be restored. Refer to Figure
6.1 and 6.4. w COURSE SELECT

There are two possible MFD con- A RED X will be drawn through
trol panel faults that can be dis- the course pointer head and tail if
played on the MFD. One fault is there is a course select knob fail-
the normal red CP fault caused ure on the EFS 40/50 control
by a mode line failure. The sec- panel.
ond fault is a red CCP fault
caused by a failure in the check- w RCP—RADAR CONTROL
list control panel processing. The PANEL (if equipped)
faults to be detected by the CP
469A to cause this annunciator A RED RCP enclosed by a RED
include the following: box is annunciated at the lower
left center of the EHSI display if a
1.CPU test failure radar control panel failure is
2.ROM test failure detected. Refer to Figure 6.1.
3.RAM test failure
4.Stuck joystick or control panel w SG—SYMBOL GENERATOR
key
5. Invalid data in checklist/notes A RED SG enclosed by a RED
EPROM (checksum failure). This box is annunciated at the upper
fault condition applies only if the left center of the EHSI or lower
EPROM chip is NOT completely left of the EADI if certain moni-
erased. That is, if the checksum tored functions are detected
test on EPROM chip data fails invalid. If the RED SG annuncia-
because the chip is erased, a tion is encountered extreme cau-
CCP fault should NOT be raised. tion should be used to validate
This is because the CP469A will any data used on the display for
come from the factory with the navigation. Even after validation
EPROM chips erased, and it is and revalidation the data should

6.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 6mp 9/9/10 3:57 AM Page 6.3

Fault Annunciations

only be used as supplementary be drawn through the source


information. annunciator. The bearing pointer
or NAVAID symbol is also
A large RED “SG” appearing on removed.
a black display annunciates a
Symbol Generator failure which w ALPHANUMERIC READOUT
would result in processed data ANNUNCIATIONS
that is unusable for navigation.
Failures affecting alphanumeric
RAW DATA DEVIATION readouts are annunciated by a
ANNUNCIATIONS RED X drawn through the read-
out. On the EHSI (figure 6.1), the
Pointer/Scale malfunctions are alphanumeric readouts include
annunciated by removal of the NAV bearing pointer source and
associated pointer/scale and course (CRS) or desired track
placing a RED X drawn in their (DTK).
place. A flag presented on the
vertical deviation scale will result Failures affecting distance infor-
in the deviation pointer being mation are annunciated by RED
removed. On the EHSI, the dashes in the data field. When
pointer/scale annunciations the Distance Source is opera-
include lateral deviation, GS or tional but not providing valid dis-
VN and fore/aft in Doppler and tance data (no lock on or NCD)
homing mode. On the EADI, the dashes the color of the sensor
scale annunciations include later- will be placed in the data field.
al deviation and GS or VN. Refer Speed (KT) and time (MN)
to figure 6.1 for display presenta- annunciation will be removed if
tions showing these annuncia- valid distance, speed and time-
tions. to-station information is not pro-
vided by the primary NAV sensor
Beginning with software 09, both system.
lateral and vertical deviation bars Failures affecting radio altimeter
and scales are decluttered with- information are annunciated by
out displaying a RED X when the RED dashes in the data field on
deviation information is provided the EADI. When the radio
in ARINC 429 format with a sta- altimeter source is operational
tus of No Computed Data (NCD). but not providing valid data (no
The RED X is still displayed for lock on or NCD) white dashes
invalid or missing data. will be placed in the data field.
Refer to Figure 6.4.
w BEARING POINTER
ANNUNCIATIONS w CHECK CONFIG

Bearing pointer source failure or A yellow “CHECK CONFIG”


invalid data or No Computed message will display in the upper
Data (NCD) causes a RED X to right corner of the EHSI and

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 6.3


Section 6mp 9/9/10 3:57 AM Page 6.4

Fault Annunciations

EADI whenever the system con- w BUSY VP


figuration memory in the symbol
generator and aircraft installation Displayed when the radar is in
rack do not match. the continuous VP mode.
Test routines resident in the sym- w RT FLT
bol generator select the best pos-
sible system configuration to use, Displayed with an RDR
however, the selected configura- 2000/2100 radar only to indicate
tion may not be the intended one. an ART fault that can not be
Once the CHECK CONFIG mes- identified as a radar transmitter
sage is noted, extreme caution fault (TX FLT).
should be exercised when using
any information. It is also most w STB LMT
important that the aircraft be
taken to an authorized dealer for Displayed when the combination
repair as soon possible. of tilt, roll, roll trim and pitch
exceeds +/- 30 degrees.
WEATHER RADAR
ANNUNCIATIONS w TGTALRT
While displaying weather, a white Beginning with EFS software ver-
weather radar failure or warning sion 10, “TGTALRT” is annunci-
annunciation can appear below ated in yellow to indicate an
the Weather Mode annunciation. active Target Alert. EFS with soft-
ware version 09 displays this
The annunciations capable of message in white. This message
being displayed when interfaced is only provided by the RDR
with an RDS 81, 82/VP, 84/VP, 2000/2100.
86/VP and RDR 2000/2100 are
listed below in order of priority. w TGT
w WX FLT Beginning with EFS software ver-
sion 10, “TGT” is displayed in
Advises a mismatch of mode, tilt, white to indicate that the Target
gain or range information Alert feature is armed. This mes-
between the EFIS and radar RT sage is only provided by the RDR
has existed for more than 30 sec- 2000/2100.
onds.
w 429 FLT
w WX OFF
Displayed when 429 control data
This annunciation (“OFF” before is missing or incorrect at the
S W 08) is displayed when the radar RT. Can also indicate
radar is off. improper data from a 429 sensor
to the RDR 2000/2100 radar.

6.4 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 6mp 9/9/10 3:57 AM Page 6.5

Fault Annunciations

w ANT FLT w WAIT

Displayed when the measured Displayed when in VP mode and


antenna tilt does not match the one of the TRACK buttons is
requested tilt angle. pressed, indicating the radar will
perform the desired slicing func-
w TX FLT tion as soon as the antenna
returns to the last selected profil-
Displayed when a fault is detect- ing azimuth angle.
ed in the radar transmitter. CUSTOM DISPLAY
w RANGE
FAILURE ANNUNCIATIONS
DOPPLER/CABLE
Displayed when the pilot has
selected the 1000 mile range on w EXTERNAL SYSTEM
the EFIS. The radar is unable to FAILURES
operate at this range and is
placed in standby.
FMS Warning
In the upper right hand corner of
o Installation with an RDS 81, the display, a RED X will be
RDS 82, RDS 82VP or RDR 2000 drawn through a cyan FMS if the
with EFS software 07 or later, FMS has failed or is not supply-
“RANGE” will annunciate when ing the EFS 40/50 with valid
the 5 NM, 320 NM or 1000 NM computed data.
range is selected.
Autopilot Warning
o Installation with software 06 In the upper left hand corner of
“WX FLT” (weather fault) will the display, a RED X will be
annunciate when the 5 NM or drawn through a red COUPLER if
320 NM range is selected. the autopilot or coupler has failed
These annunciations alert the or is not supplying the EFS 40/50
pilot of a range mismatch with valid computed data.
because the RDS 81, RDS 82
and RDS 82VP do not support N o t e : A configuration option
these radar ranges. selectable at the time of instal -
lation and certification allows
w STB OFF for installations of the Doppler
and Cable mode without inter -
Displayed when stab off has face to an autopilot or coupler.
been selected or when the stabi- If this option is selected the
lization reference is not present COUPLER warning will not be
at the radar. annunciated.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 6.5


Section 6mp 9/9/10 3:57 AM Page 6.6

Fault Annunciations

w TCAS FAULT MESSAGES HEADING


RA DISPLAY 1/2
The TCAS ONLY display on an RA DISPLAY 1
MFD will be replaced with up to RA DISPLAY 2
six yellow fault messages. Dur- XPDR UPPER ANT
ing this time the annunciated XPDR LOWER ANT
TCAS status will be either “TCAS TCAS TO XPDR
FAIL” or “NO TCAS” as appro- CP TO XPDR
priate. Except for the status ALT 1/2 TO XPDR
annunciation and fault mes- ALT 1 TO XPDR
sages, the display will be com- ALT 2 TO XPDR
pletely black.
The fault messages are listed in w LIGHTNING DETECTION
order of priority with the highest DISPLAY FAULT MESSAGES
first. TCAS FAIL messages have When 429 data from the lightning
priority over NO TCAS mes- sensor is missing for two sec-
sages, however both can be dis- onds or remains invalid for ten
played simultaneously (up to six seconds, the EFIS will remove
total). the lightning cells from the dis-
play and present a fault annunci-
Also refer to the TCAS Status ation consisting of a lightning
messages listed in Section 4.4. symbol followed by the letters
“FLT”.
Note: The following is a com -
plete list of all TCAS II faults
that the EFIS will display, how -
ever some of these are not
applicable to TCAS I and will
not be generated by a TCAS I
processor. Refer to the TCAS
Pilot's Guide for more informa -
tion.
Fault Messages for TCAS Fail:
PROCESSOR
UPPER ANTENNA
LOWER ANTENNA
Fault Messages for No TCAS:
RADIO ALT 1/2
RADIO ALT 1
RADIO ALT 2
XPDR 1/2
XPDR 1
XPDR 2
ATTITUDE

6.6 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 6 POmp 9/9/10 4:02 AM Page 6.7

Fault Annunciations

Figure 6.1
EHSI FAULT ANNUNCIATION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 6.7


Section 6 POmp 9/9/10 4:02 AM Page 6.8

Fault Annunciations

Figure 6.2
EHSI FAULT ANNUNCIATION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 6.8


Section 6 POmp 9/9/10 4:02 AM Page 6.9

Fault Annunciations

Figure 6.3
EHSI FAULT ANNUNCIATION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 6.9


Section 6 POmp 9/9/10 4:02 AM Page 6.10

Fault Annunciations

Figure 6.4
EADI FAULTS

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 6.10


Section 7mp 10/9/10 4:06 AM Page 7.1

REVERSIONARY Modes

REVERSIONARY MODES
The EFS 40/50 provides four dif- All external switches and plac-
ferent reversionary modes of ards are part of the installation
operation in the event of a sys- supplied by the installer. For
tem component failure; compos- information pertaining to a partic-
ite, copy, display down and ular aircraft installation refer to
standby. The reversionary the approved Aircraft Flight Man-
modes offered in a particular air- ual Supplement.
craft will vary depending on EFIS
system configuration, installation Note: This Pilot’s Guide refers
wiring and certification. The fol- to the left of the aircraft as the
lowing section describes the vari- Pilot’s position. The right side
ous reversionary modes offered is considered the copilot’s
when using the SU 463. position.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 7.1


Section 7mp 10/9/10 4:06 AM Page 7.2

REVERSIONARY Modes

CMPST - COMPOSITE tion of the symbol generator.


Available for use in two, three,
Refer to Figure 7.1 , four and five-tube installations. A
COMPOSITE MODE single switch input to the SG 465
SELECTION. instructs the symbol generator to
output the CMPST display on the
CMPST (composite) is generally EADI and EHSI. See section 4.3
used to compensate for a failure for details on the composite dis-
of a display unit or the EADI sec- play.

Figure 7.1
COMPOSITE MODE SELECTION

7.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 7mp 10/9/10 4:06 AM Page 7.3

REVERSIONARY Modes

COPY OFF-SIDE SIDE SG will provide identical


copied presentation on both the
Refer to Figure 7.2 pilot and copilot displays. To
PILOT COPY OFF-SIDE positively annunciate the selec-
MODE SELECTION. tion of the “COPY OFF-SIDE”
mode, yellow boxes will be dis-
COPY OFF-SIDE is generally played around all sensors alert-
used to compensate for a failure ing pilot and copilot they are both
of the EADI or EHSI section of using the same NAV, HDG and
the symbol generator or both. ATT source, also “COPY” will be
Available for use in dual EHSI annunciated in the lower right
and four-tube installations. The corner of the EADI and EHSI dis-
COPY mode will allow either the play. Operational control will be
pilot or copilot to copy the EADI retained by the side with the
and EHSI display presentations operating SG (the side that did
from the off-side system. When not request COPY).
“COPY” is requested, the OFF-

Figure 7.2
PILOT COPY SELECTION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 7.3


Section 7mp 10/9/10 4:06 AM Page 7.4

REVERSIONARY Modes

DISPLAY (EADI) DOWN pilot or copilot to transfer the nor-


mal EADI display to the EHSI
Refer to Figure 7.3, below the failed EADI and trans-
EADI DOWN MODE fer the EHSI display to the MFD if
SELECTION. one is installed. A single
momentary switch input to the
DISPLAY (ADI) DOWN mode SU 463 removes power from the
selection is generally used to failed EADI, transfers the EFIS
compensate for a failure of the control panel control to the MFD
EADI display unit or section of symbol generator, instructs the
the symbol generator. Available EHSI symbol section to calculate
for use in two, three, four and EADI function and the MFD sym-
five-tube installations. The DIS- bol generator to calculate match-
PLAY DOWN mode will allow the ing EHSI functions.

Figure 7.3
DISPLAY (EADI) DOWN MODE SELECTION

7.4 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 7mp 10/9/10 4:06 AM Page 7.5

REVERSIONARY Modes

STBY - STANDBY from the EADI and EHSI and


transfers the MFD display drive
Refer to Figure 7.4, to the on-side EADI and EHSI.
PILOT STBY MODE Also, the MFD control panel input
SELECTION. is removed from the MFD symbol
generator as the EFIS control
STBY (STANDBY) mode selec- panel output is switched in. The
tion is generally used to compen- MFD symbol generator is now
sate for a failed pilot’s or copilot’s performing normal on-side EADI
symbol generator. Available in and EHSI functions (inputs and
three or five-tube installations. outputs). To alert the pilot or
The STBY mode selection will copilot that the STBY mode of
allow the pilot or copilot to substi- operation has been selected, a
tute the MFD symbol generator yellow “STBY” (SG2 or SG3 are
for his on-side symbol generator. optional in SW 06) will be annun-
A single momentary switch input ciated in the lower right corner of
to the SU 463 removes the failed the EADI and EHSI.
on-side symbol generator drive

Figure 7.4
PILOT STANDBY SELECTION

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 7.5


Section 7mp 10/9/10 4:06 AM Page 7.6

REVERSIONARY Modes

REVERSIONARY MODE SELECTION


The following matrices provide Depending on the installation and
information on the ability to select certification requirements, all
different reversionary modes reversionary modes possible
when the SU 463 switching unit may not be installed in a particu-
is part of the aircraft installation. lar aircraft.

THREE TUBE EFS 40/50

Figure 7.5
THREE TUBE EFS 40/50
REVERSIONARY MODE SELECTION

7.6 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 7mp 10/9/10 4:06 AM Page 7.7

REVERSIONARY Modes

FOUR TUBE EFS 40/50

Figure 7.6
FOUR TUBE EFS 40/50
REVERSIONARY MODE SELECTIONS

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 7.7


Section 7mp 10/9/10 4:06 AM Page 7.8

REVERSIONARY Modes

FIVE TUBE EFS 40

Figure 7.7
FIVE TUBE EFS 40
REVERSIONARY MODE SELECTIONS

7.8 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 7mp 10/9/10 4:06 AM Page 7.9

REVERSIONARY Modes

FIVE TUBE EFS 50

Figure 7.8
FIVE TUBE EFS 50
REVERSIONARY MODE SELECTIONS

Note: EFS 50 installations will support dual STBY, allowing the pilot
and copilot to select STBY at the same time. EFS 40 will not sup -
port dual standby.

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 7.9


Section 7mp 10/9/10 4:06 AM Page 7.10

REVERSIONARY Modes

* This page intentionally left blank.

7.10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


Section 8mp 9/9/10 4:05 AM Page 8.1

Glossary

GLOSSARY
ABBREVIATIONS
ABV Above
ADF Automatic Direction Finder
ADS Air Data System
ADI Attitude Director Indicator
AHRS Attitude Heading Reference System
AHS Attitude Heading System
ANG Angle
ANT Antenna
ARINC Aeronautical Radio INCorporated
ATR Air Transport Radio
ATT Attitude
AZ Azimuth
BAZ Back Azimuth
BC Back Course
BLW Below
BRG Bearing
BRT Bright
CCP` Checklist Control Panel
CDI Course Deviation Indicator or Course
Deviation Information
CDU Control Display Unit
CONFIG Configuration
CP Control Panel
CRS Course
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
D-BAR Deviation Bar
DEG Degree(s)
DEV Deviation
DG Directional Gyro
DIR Direct
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
DTK Desired Track
DU Display Unit
EADI Electronic Attitude Direction Indicator
ED Electronic Display
EFS or EFIS Electronic Flight Instrument System
EGPWS Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System
EHSI Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator
FHDG Free Directional Gyro (heading)
FL Flight Level (Pressure altitude)
FLT Fault
FMS Flight Management System

Issued 6/08 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 8.1


Section 8mp 9/9/10 4:05 AM Page 8.2

Glossary

FPL Flight Plan


FR From
FT Feet
GP Glidepath (used with MLS and GPS approach)
GPS Global Positioning System
GS Ground Speed or Glideslope
HDG Heading
HSI Horizontal Situation Indicator
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
ID Identification
ILS Instrument Landing System
KTS Knots (nautical miles per hour)
LMT Limit
LNAV Long-range NAVigation
LOR Loran
MLS Microwave Landing System
NAV Navigation
NM Nautical Mile
RA Resolution Advisory
RCP Radar Control Panel
REF Reference
RMI Radio Magnetic Indicator
RNAV Area NAVigation
SG Symbol Generator
SN Sensitivity
STB Stabilization
STBY Standby
SW Software
SYNC Synchronization
TA Traffic Advisory
TACAN Tactical Air Navigation
TCAS Traffic alert and Collision Avoidance System
TCN TACAN, Tactical Air Navigation
TD Traffic Display
TST Test
TTS Time-To-Station
TTW Time-to-Waypoint
TX Transmitter
VNAV Vertical Navigation
VN Vertical Navigation Scale
VOR VHF Omni Range
VORTAC VOR and TACAN co-located
VP Vertical Profile
WX Weather
WXA Weather Alert

8.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


IndexMP 9/8/10 7:38 PM Page 9.1

Index

INDEX
A
ADF ...........................................................................................................
ADF 1...........................1.6, 1.9, 1.12, 1.15, 1.18, 2.1, 2.3, 2.6, 5.2, 5.4
ADF 2....................................................1.6, 1.9, 1.12, 1.15, 1.18, 2.1.6
ALPHANUMERIC READOUT ANNUNCIATIONS................................6.3
AN ...................i.1, 1.1, 1.3, 2.1.4-10, 2.2.1-2, 2.3.1, 2.3.4, 2.4.1-6, 4.1.1,
..............................4.1.3-21, 4.1.23-25, 4.2.1-5, 4.2.7-12, 4.2.15, 4.3.1-3,
....................4.4.1-3, 4.4.6-9, 4.4.11, 4.4.13, 4.4.15, 5.2-4, 6.1, 6.4-5, 8.1
ANT FLT ...............................................................................................6.4
APPROACH PROCEDURES ...............................................................5.3
ARC ...........................................................................................................
ARC NAV MAP ..............................................................................2.1.7
ARC SECTORED MODE SELECTION: ........................................2.1.7
ATT........................1.8, 1.11, 1.14, 1.17, 1.20, 4.2.12-13, 4.2.15, 7.3, 8.1
ATTITUDE..................................1.6, 1.9, 1.12, 1.15, 1.18, 4.1.1, 4.2.1-2,
............................................4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.13, 4.2.15-16, 6.1, 6.5, 8.1
AUTO TILT ............................................................................2.3.4, 4.1.18
AUTOPILOT WARNING .......................................................................6.5

B
BACK COURSE ........................................................................................
BACK COURSE APPROACH...........................................................5.3
BC..........................1.7, 1.10, 1.13, 1.16, 1.19, 4.1.15, 4.2.8, 5.3-4, 8.1
BEARING ..................................................................................................
#1 BEARING POINTER.................................................................4.1.9
#2 BEARING POINTER..........................................................4.1.9, 5.2
1-2 PUSH BUTTON...................................................2.4.3, 4.1.2-3, 5.2
BEARING POINTER ........2.1.6, 4.1.6-11, 4.1.15-16, 4.1.20, 5.2-4, 6.3
BEARING POINTER ANNUNCIATIONS ..........................................6.3
BEARING POINTER SELECT ................................................2.1.6, 5.2
BRT KNOB ............................................................................2.1.10, 2.2.2
BUSY VP ..............................................................................................6.4

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 9.1


IndexMP 9/8/10 7:38 PM Page 9.2

Index

C
CATEGORY I .............................................................................4.2.12-14
CHECK CONFIG...............................................................................6.3-4
CHECKLIST ..............................................................................................
CHECKLIST INTERFACE .............................................................4.4.3
COMMAND BARS.......1.8, 1.11, 1.14, 1.17, 1.20, 4.2.2-3, 4.2.11, 4.2.13
COMPASS CARD ...........................4.1.1, 4.1.4, 4.1.9-11, 4.1.14, 4.1.16,
...................................................................4.1.18, 4.1.22-25, 4.3.2, 4.4.1
COMPOSITE ..........................................4.2.10-11, 4.2.13, 4.3.1-4, 7.1-2
COPY ................................................................................4.2.13, 7.1, 7.3
COOLING .............................................................................................6.1
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR .............................4.1.15, 4.1.21, 8.1
COURSE SELECT ....................................................................................
COURSE SELECT KNOB ...................2.1.10, 2.4.2, 4.1.4-5, 4.4.1, 6.2
CRS ................................1.11, 1.14, 1.17, 1.20, 2.4.2, 4.1.3-5, 4.3.1-2,
..................................................4.4.1, 4.4.7, 4.4.10, 5.2-4, 6.1, 6.3, 8.1
CRS KNOB ..........................................2.4.2, 4.1.5, 4.4.1, 4.4.10, 5.3-4
CONTROL PANELS ..........................................2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.2, 4.1.19
CP 466A ..............................................................i.1, 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 4, 2.4.1
CP 466B ............................................................................i.1, 2.3.1, 2.3.4
CP 468 ..........................i.1, 2.1.1-2, 2.1.10, 2.4.2-3, 2.4.6, 3.2, 5.1-3, 6.2
CP 469A ............i.1, 1.2, 2.4.1, 2.4.4, 3.5, 4.4.3-4, 4.4.6-8, 4.4.10-11, 6.2

D
DETAILED OPERATING CONTROLS....................................2.1.1, 2.2.1
DG ............................1.7, 1.10, 1.13, 1.16, 1.19, 2.1.5, 2.4.5, 4.1.1-2, 8.1
DIRECT TO .......................................................................1.2, 2.1.10, 5.2
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS CONTROL ....................................2.1.10, 2.2.2
DISTANCE, GROUNDSPEED AND TIME-TO-STATION .................4.1.6
DME...........................................................................................................
DME HOLD......................................................4.1.6-9, 4.3.1, 4.3.3, 5.3
DOPPLER .................................................................................................
DOPP.................................................................................2.1.4, 4.1.22
DOPPLER VELOCITY BARS ......................................................4.1.22
9.2 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10
IndexMP 9/8/10 7:38 PM Page 9.3

Index

DRIFT ANGLE POINTER ......................................................4.1.3, 4.1.13


DTK ..............................................................2.4.2, 4.1.4-5, 5.3-4, 6.3, 8.1
DU-DISPLAY UNIT LOSS OF COOLING ............................................6.1

E
EGPWS ...........................................................................................4.4.16
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ..................................................4.4.4, 5.5
EXTERNAL SYSTEM FAILURES .................................................6.1, 6.5

F
FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS ....................................................4.4.10, 6.1-6
FR .........................................................................4.1.15, 4.3.1, 4.3.3, 8.2
FREE DG...........................................................................................4.1.1
FROM .........1.5-6, 2.1.3, 2.2.2, 2.3.4, 2.4.2, 2.4.4-5, 4.1.5-11, 4.1.13-17,
..............................4.1.19, 4.1.21-26, 4.2.1-2, 4.2.6-7, 4.2.11-12, 4.3.1-3,
.............................4.4.1-4, 4.4.6, 4.4.8-10, 4.4.13, 5.2-4, 6.1-2, 7.3-5, 8.2
FT ..................................................................4.1.12, 4.2.7, 4.2.14-15, 8.2
FULL TIME LNAV MAP ..............................................................4.1.19-20

G
GAIN............................................................................2.3.3-4, 4.1.18, 6.4
GLIDESLOPE............................................................................................
GS.....................................1.7, 1.10, 1.13, 1.16, 1.19, 4.1.7, 4.1.11-12,
...........................................4.2.4, 4.2.9, 4.2.11, 4.2.14-15, 5.3, 6.3, 8.2
GND MAP.......................................................................................2.3.2-4

H
HEADING SELECT ...................................................................................
HEADING BUG......................................................................................
HDG BUG.................................................................................4.1.21
HEADING SELECT “BUG” .....................................................4.1.4, 6.2
HEADING SELECT KNOB .........................................2.1.10, 4.1.4, 6.2
HEADING SYNC .............................................................................2.1.10
HOMING ....................................................................................................
HOM.............................................................................................4.1.25

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 9.3


IndexMP 9/8/10 7:38 PM Page 9.4

Index

HSI ...............................................1.6, 2.1.4-5, 2.1.7, 2.4.2, 2.4.4, 4.1.16,


.................................................................4.2.8, 4.2.12-13, 4.4.9, 5.2, 8.2

I
ILS .............................................................................................................
ILS APPROACH .....................................................................4.1.5, 5.3
IN-FLIGHT OPERATION ......................................................................5.2

K
KNS 81 ........................................2.1.4, 2.4.3-5, 4.1.3, 4.1.14, 4.1.16, 5.3

L
LATERAL COURSE ..................................................................................
LATERAL COURSE DEVIATION BAR................................4.1.6, 4.3.2
LATERAL COURSE DEVIATION SCALE ...........................4.1.5, 4.3.2
LIGHTNING ...............................................................................................
LIGHTNING DETECTION..................................................2.1.5, 4.1.19
LIMITATIONS ................................................................................5.1, 5.5
LNAV .........................................................................................................
LNAV MAP..........................................................2.1.9, 2.4.1, 4.1.19-20
LOC .................................................................4.1.15, 4.2.7-8, 4.2.15, 5.3
LOR ..........................................................2.1.3, 2.1.5, 4.1.10, 4.1.13, 8.2

M
MAGNETIC................................................................................................
MAG..........................................................................................4.1.9-11
MAG VAR .................................................................................4.1.9-11
MAP ...........................................................................................................
360 MAP DISPLAYS....................................................................4.1.14
360 NAV MAP................................................................................2.1.7
360 DEGREE MAP WX RADAR..................................................4.1.17
MAP 360 COMPASS CARD ........................................................4.1.14
MAP COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR....................................4.1.15
NO MAP...........................................................................4.1.15, 4.1.19
MEMORY ..........................................................2.1.3, 4.1.23, 4.4.4-6, 6.3
MFD ....i.1, 1.2-3, 1.9-10, 1.12-13, 1.15-16, 1.18-19, 2.1.5, 2.1.7-8, 2.3.4,
.............2.4.1-6, 3.4-5, 4.1.7, 4.1.17, 4.1.19, 4.4.1-16, 5.1, 6.2, 6.5, 7.4-5

9.4 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


IndexMP 9/8/10 7:38 PM Page 9.5

Index

MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY ........................................2.1.7, 2.4.1, 4.4.1


MLS...1.6, 1.9, 1.12, 1.15, 1.18, 1.20, 4.1.4, 4.1.6-8, 4.1.11-12, 4.2.7-10,
...................................................................4.2.12-13, 4.2.15, 4.3.2-3, 8.2
MODE........................................................................................................
1-2......................................2.1.3, 2.1.5, 2.4.3, 4.1.2-3, 4.4.7, 4.4.9, 5.2
360-DEGREE MODE .....................................................................2.1.7

N
NAV ...........................................................................................................
1-2 NAVIGATION SYSTEM SELECT............................................2.1.3
NAV CDI MAP................................................................................2.1.7
NAV MAP ...................2.1.5, 2.1.7-9, 2.4.4, 4.1.4, 4.1.16-17, 4.4.3, 5.3
NAV NAVIGATION SENSOR SELECT .........................................2.1.3
NAVIGATION SOURCE ANNUNCIATION ..........................4.1.2, 4.3.2
NDB .........................................................................2.1.5, 4.1.11, 5.2, 5.4

O
OFF .......2.2.2, 2.3.2, 2.3.4, 2.4.3-4, 4.1.11, 4.1.14, 4.1.16-17, 4.1.19-20,
....................................4.2.3, 4.2.7, 4.4.2, 4.4.4-5, 4.4.7-9, 5.1, 6.4-5, 7.3
OFF-STBY-TST-ON ..........................................................................2.3.2
OMG .........................................................2.1.3, 2.1.5, 4.1.10, 4.1.13, 8.2
ON ............i.1-2, 1.2, 1.2, 1.7, 1.9-10, 1.12-13, 1.15-16, 1.18-19, 2.1.2-8,
........................2.1.10, 2.2.1-2, 2.3.1-4, 2.4.1-6, 4.1.2-5, 4.1.7, 4.1.10-22,
.....................4.1.24, 4.1.26, 4.2.2, 4.2.5-16, 4.3.1-3, 4.4.1-13, 4.4.15-16,
...............................................................................5.1-5, 6.1-5, 7.1-3, 7.6
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .....................................2.1.2, 2.2.1, 5.1-6

P
PITCH.....................................4.2.1-3, 4.2.5, 4.2.7, 4.2.15, 4.3.1, 6.1, 6.4
PLAN VIEW ................................................................2.1.5, 2.4.2, 2.4.4-5
PRE-TAKEOFF PROCEDURES ..........................................................5.1
PRE-FLIGHT PROCEDURES ..............................................................5.1
PULL ARL..........................................................................................2.3.4
PULL AUTO.......................................................................................2.3.4
PULL STAB OFF ...............................................................................2.3.4
PUSH BUTTON TEST..........................................................................5.1

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 9.5


IndexMP 9/8/10 7:38 PM Page 9.6

Index

R
RADAR ......................................................................................................
RADAR CONTROLS ...........................................................2.1.8, 2.3.1
RCP-RADAR CONTROL PANEL .....................................................6.2
RDR 1400 ........................................................................4.1.17, 4.4.15
TARGET ALERT...................................................................4.1.19, 6.4
RADIO ALTIMETER...................................1.2, 2.2.2, 4.2.6-9, 4.2.13, 6.3
RANGE......................................................................................................
RANGE DOWN....................................................................2.1.8, 4.4.9
RANGE RING..........................2.4.4, 4.1.14, 4.1.16-17, 4.4.1-2, 4.4.12
RANGE SELECTION........................................2.1.8, 4.1.17-19, 4.4.12
RANGE UP ................................................................2.1.8, 2.4.3, 4.4.9
RAW DATA DEVIATION ANNUNCIATIONS .......................................6.3
REF ...........................................................................................................
REF MAP FORMAT.......................................................................2.1.9
REVERSIONARY MODE ................................4.1.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.15, 7.6-9
RISING RUNWAY ..............................1.14, 1.17, 1.20, 4.2.7-9, 4.2.13-14
RNAV.........................................................................................................
RNV .............................................................................................4.1.10
ROLL ..................................................1.8, 1.11, 1.14, 1.17, 1.20, 4.2.1-3,
...........................................................4.2.5, 4.2.11, 4.2.15, 4.3.1, 6.1, 6.4

S
SELECTED COURSE ..................2.1.3, 2.1.10, 2.4.2, 4.1.4-6, 4.1.12-15,
...................................................4.1.25, 4.2.8-9, 4.3.1-2, 4.4.1, 5.2-4, 6.1
SELF TEST ......................................................................2.1.8, 2.2.2, 5.1
SN.............................................................................................4.1.26, 8.2
SOFTWARE ..............................................................................................
SOFTWARE 04...........i.1, 1.6, 2.1.4, 2.1.8, 2.4.6, 4.1.6, 4.1.22, 4.1.24
SOFTWARE 05.........................................................1.9, 4.1.19, 4.1.25
SOFTWARE 06........................................1.12, 2.1.5, 4.1.4, 4.1.12, 6.4
SOFTWARE 07..................1.15, 2.4.2, 4.1.7, 4.1.13, 4.2.12, 4.4.2, 6.4
SOFTWARE 08 ......................i.1, 1.18, 2.1.3-5, 2.1.8-9, 4.1.3, 4.1.6-7,
................................................................4.1.12, 4.2.9-10, 4.4.3, 4.4.11
STAB OFF ..................................................................................2.3.4, 6.5
STANDARD EHSI DISPLAYS..............................4.1.1, 4.1.16, 4.1.22-24

9.6 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


IndexMP 9/8/10 7:38 PM Page 9.7

Index

START UP............................................................................................5.1
STB LMT ..............................................................................................6.4
STB OFF ..............................................................................................6.5
STBY........................................................2.3.2, 4.1.17, 4.4.14, 7.5, 7.9, 8.2
SYMBOL....................................................................................................
SG-SYMBOL GENERATOR.............................................................6.2
SG-SYMBOL GENERATOR LOSS OF COOLING...........................6.1
SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT ........4.1.3, 4.1.5, 4.1.10, 4.1.17-18, 4.1.22-24,
.....................................................4.1.26, 4.2.2-3, 4.3.1, 4.4.1-2, 4.4.12
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ...............................1.1-20, 4.1.3, 6.3-4, 7.1

T
TCAS .........................................................................................................
TCAS INTERFACE ................................................................................
TCAS SELECTION ....................................................................2.4.6
TCAS DISPLAY FORMAT .......................................................4.4.12
TCAS TRAFFIC SYMBOLOGY................................................4.4.12
TCAS DISPLAY ANNUNCIATIONS .........................................4.4.13
TCN ......................................................................2.1.3, 4.1.3, 4.1.10, 8.2
TENDENCY CIRCLE...........................................................4.1.23, 4.1.25
THRUST COMMAND ......................................................................4.1.25
TILT ...........................................................................2.3.4, 4.1.17-18, 6.4
TO ................................i.1-2, 1.1-3, 1.5-6, 1.9, 1.12, 1.15, 1.18, 2.1.2-10,
..............................................2.2.1-2, 2.3.1-4, 2.4.1-6, 4.1.1-26, 4.2.1-13,
................................4.2.15-16, 4.3.1-3, 4.4.1-15, 5.1-5, 6.1-5, 7.1-6, 7.9
TO-FROM..........................................................................................5.2-4
TRUE .............................2.4.4, 4.1.9, 4.1.11, 4.1.16, 4.2.13, 4.2.16, 4.4.2
TST .............................................2.1.8-9, 2.2.2, 2.3.2, 4.4.10-11, 5.1, 8.2
TST/REF....................................................................................................
SELF TEST...................................................................2.1.8, 2.2.2, 5.1
TX FLT..................................................................................................6.4

V
VELOCITY AND TARGET SCALE ..................................................4.1.22
VN...................................................................................4.1.12, 4.2.9, 6.3

Issued 8/10 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 9.7


IndexMP 9/8/10 7:38 PM Page 9.8

Index

VNAV .......1.7, 1.10, 1.13, 1.16, 1.19-20, 4.1.11-12, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.3, 8.2
VNAV GPS PRECISION APPROACH..............................................5.4
VOR...........................................................................................................
VOR APPROACH .............................................................................5.5
VERTICAL PROFILE.................................................................................
VP.......................................................2.3.1, 2.3.3-4, 4.4.1-2, 6.4-5, 8.2

W
WAIT...........................................................................................2.3.3, 6.5
WEATHER.................................................................................................
WEATHER RADAR ANNUNCIATIONS............................................6.4
WX...............................................................2.3.2-3, 4.1.17-18, 6.4, 8.2
WX FLT.................................................................................4.1.18, 6.4
WXA.........................................................................2.3.2-3, 4.1.18, 8.2
WIND VECTOR .........................................................................................
WIND VECTOR INFORMATION ................................4.1.13, 4.1.23-24

9.8 SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 Issued 8/10


coverMP 9/8/10 7:35 PM Page 3

Honeywell International Inc.


One Technology Center
23500 West 105th Street
Olathe, Kansas 66061
FAX 913-791-1302
Telephone: (913) 712-0400

Copyright © 1996,2005, 2008, 2010 Honeywell International Inc.


All rights reserved.
006-08701-0000 8/10
SW 04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12/13/14/15/16

You might also like